JP2021000300A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine comprising an RTC function for executing a special performance for every prescribed time, and enhanced in game amusement.SOLUTION: In a normal performance period in which a special performance is not executed, a normal first notice performance is executed as a first notice performance. In a special performance period in which a special performance is executed, a special first notice performance is executed as the first notice performance. The normal first notice performance is executed by displaying a shooting star image 300 indicating such a situation that shooting stars go from display screens 71a, 72a of left and right sub liquid crystal screens to a display screen 7a of a center main liquid crystal. On the other hand, the special first notice performance displays a character image formed of characters being prepared, on a part of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, in a mode different from that of the normal first notice performance, and displays a gauge image indicating progress of the special first notice performance on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 59

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine, and can be particularly applied to a pachinko gaming machine or the like.

Conventionally, a game machine is provided with an effect device such as a liquid crystal display, a movable accessory (gimmick), and a speaker, and various effects are executed according to the progress of the game. Some of these types of gaming machines have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special effect different from the usual effect as the game progresses every time a predetermined time is measured. By arranging a plurality of game machines having such a function side by side in the island facility in the game hall, a special effect by the plurality of game machines can be executed all at once at a predetermined cycle (for example, Patent Document 1). reference).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-180295

However, the function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals has already been well known, and simply providing the function is not sufficient to improve the game entertainment.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention has adopted the following configuration.

That is, the gaming machine of means 1
Identification information display means that can display identification information,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result.
A special effect period generating means capable of generating a special effect period in which a special effect image is displayed on a predetermined display unit at a predetermined cycle,
Equipped with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect executing means is
The gist is that the advance notice effect regarding the variation display can be executed in different modes depending on whether the special effect period has occurred or the special effect period has occurred.

According to the above invention, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

It is a front view of the game machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a back view of the gaming machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board of the Example of this invention. It is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, and is the figure which shows the display which the game machine includes. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the game machine. It is a table showing the correspondence between the type of winning and the opening pattern of the big winning opening. It is a table which shows various random numbers acquired by a game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot judgment table, (B) is a jackpot type judgment table, (C) is a reach judgment table, (D) is a normal symbol hit judgment table, and (E) is a normal symbol variation. It is a pattern selection table. It is a table which shows the fluctuation pattern table. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the start ball entry processing. It is a flowchart of a normal figure operation process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol hit / miss judgment process. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol random number shift process. It is a flowchart of a process during a normal symbol change. It is a flowchart of a normal symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of ordinary electric accessory processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 standby processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 1 changing process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 1 determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 standby processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a pass / fail determination process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. Special Figure 2 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol 2 changing process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of fluctuation interruption processing. It is a flowchart of the special symbol 2 determination process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game). It is a flowchart of a jackpot game start process. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 1. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game). It is a flowchart of the special figure operation status setting process 2. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart of power-off monitoring processing. It is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 2ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is a block which shows the structure of the sub-control board of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the 10ms timer interrupt processing of Example 2. It is a flowchart of the special production-related processing of Example 2. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the special effect (RTC effect) of Example 2, (a) is the explanatory view which shows an example of the display screen which performs the preceding effect, (b) is the display screen which performs the main effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen when the special effect (RTC effect) is executed in the special game state of Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen in which the normal 1st notice effect of Example 2 is performed. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the display screen in which the special 1st notice effect of Example 2 is performed. This is the first notice production determination table of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of the special production-related processing of Example 3. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing of Example 4. It is a flowchart of the special effect cancellation selection process of Example 4.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to examples. In the following, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed with the end of the variable display of the symbol, the pachinko gaming machine capable of executing the winning game capable of giving a predetermined amount of game profit (for example, a prize ball) to the player. , An example to which the present invention is applied will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment includes a gaming machine frame 50 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 50, and the gaming board 2 is a gaming machine. It is detachably configured from the frame 50. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the game board 2 is removed from the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame 51 having a decorative surface, a main body frame 52 for attaching a game board 2 and the like, and an outer frame 53 for attaching the pachinko game machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. ing. The outer frame 53 is fixed to the island equipment, and the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are attached to the outer frame via the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56. Further, the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are pivotally supported on one side end side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) in the vertical direction, and can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 53 with the one side end side as an axis. It is configured. Further, from the closed state shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, only the front frame 51 can be opened (opened), or both the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 can be opened (opened).

Further, the front frame 51 can supply a launch handle 60 for launching a game ball with a firing intensity according to a player's operation amount (rotation angle), and a game ball that stores and stores the game ball to the launcher side. A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 and a surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 62 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 61 are provided. Further, the front frame 51 has a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by a player during execution of a game effect that is executed as the game progresses. (These two effect buttons are collectively referred to simply as "effect button 63" or "input means"). As for the plurality of effect buttons, the effect buttons to be used can be properly used according to the type of game effect. The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment of the first embodiment, and any input detecting means (for example,) that can detect the input from the player or that the player directly contacts the button portion to input the effect button 63. , Appearance type, touch sensor type, etc.), or non-contact type input detection means (photoelectric type, etc.) that detects that a part of the player's body is in close proximity and inputs. Good.

Further, the front frame 51 is provided with a decorative frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and an image display device (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are in front of the front frame 51 (on the player side) so that the player can easily see the display screens 71a and 72a. It is installed so as to protrude toward the surface and inclined outward. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72, similarly to the image display device 7 to be described later, depending on the execution / non-execution of the game, the situation of the game, the game effect to be executed, and the like. Game production (characters, production patterns, etc.), demo production, information about the game (acquired ball information, number of rounds, number of consecutive villas, remaining period of game state, game mode, reliability / explanation of game production, etc.) , Information on game machine settings (volume setting information, brightness setting information, etc.) is displayed. Further, the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may display different information or display the same information among these information. Further, the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display the same information as when different information is displayed. There are cases where it is done. Further, the same information is displayed by any two of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72, and the remaining one displays different information. May be displayed. It should be noted that any or all of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 may be simply referred to as an "image display device".

Further, the image display device 7 is provided in the inner region of the game area 3 formed on the game board 2, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 are provided in the outer region of the game area 3. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the second image display device 71 (provided at the non-open side end portion) is attached to the front frame 51 via the second image display device hinge 75 (hinge portion). Has been done. Therefore, the hinges 75 for the upper and lower second image display devices can be rotated in the left-right direction as an axis. More specifically, the configuration is such that it can rotate a predetermined angle (about 45 degrees) to the right from the state shown in FIG. 1 (normal state). This is because the second image display device 71, which is provided so as to project forward of the front frame 51 when the front frame 51 and the main body frame 52 are opened with the upper and lower frame hinges 56 and 56 as axes, pachinko. It is a configuration to prevent damage due to collision with hall equipment (ball lending machine, inter-table equipment, etc.) provided adjacent to the frame hinge 56 side (left side of the paper in FIG. 1) of the game machine 1. .. On the other hand, the third image display device 72 (provided at the end on the open side) is fixed to the front frame 51 and is non-rotatable.

The game board 2 is formed with a game area 3 in which a game ball launched by the operation of the launch handle 60 flows down, surrounded by a rail member 4. Further, the game board 2 is provided with a board surface lamp 5 for decoration. A plurality of game nails 16 for guiding the game ball are projected in the game area 3. Further, a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the tip of the rail member 4, and it is possible to prevent the game ball once guided to the game area from returning to the launching device side.

Further, an image display device 7 composed of a liquid crystal display device is provided near the center of the game area 3. The image display device 7 is attached to the game board 2 from the back surface side of the game board 2. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (also simply referred to as "effect symbols") are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and the effect symbol display area 7b (also referred to as "effect symbol display unit"). ) Is provided, and the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are in the gaming state according to the gaming state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state, low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). The variable display is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol described later) set as the main body of the game in. The production symbol 8L is also referred to as a "left symbol", the production symbol 8C is also referred to as a "middle symbol", and the production symbol 8R is also referred to as a "right symbol".

The display mode of the effect symbol display area 7b shown in FIG. 3 shows one scene when the game state is in the normal state (low accuracy low base state, state A described later). As will be described in detail later, in this low probability low base state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the start port (second start port 21) is set lower than in the high base state (first game state). At the same time, the probability of winning / failing the special symbol (the first special symbol hit / fail judgment and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) is low (also referred to as “predetermined probability”), and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. It is set longer (more than twice) than the fluctuation time of (all deviation fluctuations are 10 minutes). Therefore, in the normal state, the game ball is launched into the right game area 3B (second game area) and entered into the start port (second start port 21 or third start port 26) to display the second special symbol in a variable manner. It is more advantageous for the player to play a game in which the game ball is launched into the left game area 3A (first game area) and entered into the first starting port 20 to display the first special symbol in a variable manner. Has been done. That is, in the normal state, it can be said that the game state is a game state in which the first special symbol (directed symbol) is mainly used for variable display. Therefore, in the normal state (state A), the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R on the effect symbol display area 7b are configured to perform variable display and stop display in synchronization with the first special symbol.

Further, each of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is composed of a plurality of symbols (identification information) representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. Depending on the display mode (stop display mode) of the left, middle, and right effect symbols displayed (derived display) in the effect symbol display area 7b, the first special symbol display 41a (“first”) described later (see FIG. 4). The result of the variable display of the first special symbol displayed on the "special symbol display unit") and the second special displayed on the second special symbol display 41b (also referred to as the "second special symbol display unit"). The result of the variation display of the symbol (the result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is displayed (notified) so that the player can easily recognize it. In addition, any (or all) of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the effect symbol may be simply referred to as "design" or "identification information". Further, the special symbol hit / fail judgment is also simply referred to as "hit / fail judgment" or "first hit / fail judgment". Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the special symbol winning / failing determination is also referred to as a "winning / failing determination executing means" or a "first winning / failing determination executing means".

For example, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit (first specific hit), the production symbol is stopped with the same three-digit doublet (also called "big hit symbol") such as "777". indicate. In addition, in the case of a small hit (second specific hit), a preset chance symbol such as "135" or a special symbol for small hits such as "3 ★ 3" (also referred to as a "small hit symbol") is used. Stop and display the design. In addition, when a small hit occurs, the symbol for the small hit may be stopped and displayed, and the symbol of the same aspect may be stopped and displayed for the small hit symbol and the off symbol. In addition, when there are a plurality of small hits (first small hit, second small hit, etc.) as small hits, different small hit symbols (first small hit symbol, second small hit symbol, etc.) can be distinguished from each other. ) May be stopped and displayed, or the same (common) small hit symbol may be stopped and displayed so that it is difficult to distinguish them.

In addition, when the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is incorrect, at least one of the three symbols such as "637" and "373" is stopped and displayed as a different design ("Missing symbol"). Also called). As a result, the player can easily grasp the progress of the game (result of the special symbol winning / failing determination) by looking at the stopped display of the effect symbol. That is, in general, the player does not directly grasp the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination by looking at the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, but rather directs the result. See and grasp the effect symbol 8 displayed in the symbol display area 7b. Further, as the execution mode of the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a mode of scrolling display in the up / down, left / right, diagonal directions, etc. In addition to 7b, one or both of the second effect symbol display unit 71a (display screen 71a) and the third effect symbol display unit 72a (display screen 72a) are used to display the effect. In addition to this, it may have an aspect in which the effect is displayed using only the second effect symbol display unit 71a or the third effect symbol display unit 72a.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in addition to displaying a game effect using the above-mentioned effect symbol (effect symbol game effect), it is executed in association with the hit game (big hit game, small hit game). The hit game production (big hit game production, small hit game production) and the demonstration production for waiting for customers are displayed. In addition, in the production pattern game production, the winning game production, and the demonstration production, in addition to the production symbols such as numbers, the production images other than the production symbols such as the background image and the character image are also displayed. Further, as will be described in detail later, the game state (state A, state B or state C), the state in which the game ball is fired in the left game area 3A to play the game, or the game ball is fired in the right game area 3B. The display mode on the effect symbol display area 7b is different depending on whether the game is being played or the like. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a gaming machine capable of displaying both the first special symbol and the second special symbol in parallel (simultaneously) in a variable manner, and is a game of this type. The machine is also called a "simultaneous variable machine (parallel variable machine)".

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display unit) for displaying the first effect hold 9a according to the number of stored first special figure hold described later, and There is a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display unit) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of storages of the second special figure hold described later. Depending on the display mode (number of displays) of the first effect hold 9a or the second effect hold 9b in the effect hold display area, the first special figure hold displayed by the first special figure hold indicator 43a (see FIG. 4) described later. The number of memories of the second special figure hold and the number of memories of the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b can be shown to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The display position of the first effect hold display unit and the display position of the second effect hold display unit may change depending on the game state, the game mode, or the game effect (reach effect, etc.) to be executed. In addition, only one of the first effect hold display unit and the second effect hold display unit (for example, only the effect hold display unit corresponding to the main special symbol (effect symbol) depending on the game state) is displayed. It may be.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a center decorative body 10 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and in front of the image display device 7 so as to surround the effect symbol display area 7b. At the lower part of the center decorative body 10, a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which the game ball can roll is provided. A hollow warp portion 12 is provided on the left portion of the center decoration body 10. The warp portion 12 is provided with a warp inlet and a warp outlet, receives a game ball flowing down the game area 3 from the warp inlet, discharges the game ball from the warp outlet, and guides the game ball to the stage portion 11. The game ball guided to the rolling surface of the stage portion 11 has a higher possibility than the game ball not guided to the stage portion 11, and can enter the first starting port 20 described later. Further, above the center decorative body 10, an illuminated member (board lamp 5) such as an LED is provided and can be turned on according to the game state, and a decorative member 13 in the shape of characters, figures, or the like is arranged. There is.

Further, a movable decorative member 14 that is above the center decorative body 10 and behind the decorative member 13 is provided so as to be able to move along with the game effect. In FIG. 3, only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible, but for example, the movable decorative member 14 falls downward (predetermined) with the execution of the game effect having a relatively high possibility of hitting. (Operates in an operating mode), the movable decorative member 14 covers the front surface of the display screen 7a, and most of the movable decorative member 14 becomes visible. As a result, the player enhances the interest in the game and raises the expectation for the hit.

Below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, a fixed winning device 19 provided with a non-variable first starting port 20 in which the ease of entering the game ball does not change is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, a random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct ( The first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the first hit / fail judgment) is executed, the first special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment.

Above the right side area (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, the gate 28 (normal drawing start port, pass port, ball entry port, and specific start) through which the game ball can pass (enter) (Also called a mouth) is provided. The game ball that has entered from the upstream side of the gate 28 passes through the gate 28 and flows down the game area 3 in the downstream direction. The gate 28 also serves as a start gate 29 (also referred to as a combination gate or an operation gate) for starting a big hit game. That is, this gate is a gate 28 and also a start gate 29. When a game ball enters (passes) into the gate 28, the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a, a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol is correct is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation condition) is satisfied, it is normal. Along with executing the symbol hit / fail judgment (also referred to as "normal symbol hit / fail judgment" or "third hit / fail judgment"), the normal symbol starts to change and display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the normal symbol is displayed based on the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment. Stop display. When the hit normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the movable member 23 operates (opens) and the second starting port 21 is opened. Further, the control unit (main control unit 80) that executes the normal symbol hit / fail determination of whether or not the movable member 23 is operated (opened) to open the second starting port 21 is a "hit / fail determination executing means". It is also referred to as a "third hit / miss determination execution means". The gate sensor 28a also serves as a start gate sensor 29a for starting a big hit game. That is, the sensor that detects the entry into the main gate is the gate sensor 28a and the start gate sensor 29a.

Further, as will be described in detail later, when passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), the function as the start gate 29 is exhibited when the conditions for executing the big hit game are satisfied (“big hit”). It is also called "executable state" or "big hit standby state"). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 (start gate 29) when the condition (big hit standby state) is not satisfied, the control process related to the normal symbol is performed and the big hit start process is not executed. In addition, when the game ball passes through the start gate 29 (gate 28) when the condition is satisfied (in the jackpot standby state), the standby jackpot game starts, and the predetermined jackpot (a predetermined jackpot) The round game in which the first large winning opening 30) is opened (the ball can be entered) starts.

In the game area 3 on the right side of the center decoration 10 (right game area 3B) in the game area 3, the game area below (downstream) the gate 28 (start gate 29) is a first having a first large winning opening 30. A large winning device 31 (also referred to as a "first variable ball entrance") is provided. The first prize-winning device 31 includes an opening / closing member 32, and the opening / closing member 32 opens and closes the first prize-winning opening 30. The opening / closing member 32 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular (long plate shape) upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is closed and the game ball is placed on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32. It is possible to pass through. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from left to right on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 without entering the first large winning opening 30. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 32 retracts toward the back surface of the game board 3 to form the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 forming the game ball passage. Is gone. As a result, when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the first large winning opening 30 will enter the first large winning opening 30. In this way, the opening / closing member 32 that opens / closes the entrance of the first large winning opening 30 is a retractable opening / closing member, and when in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down is smoothly moved to the first large. In addition to allowing the ball to enter the winning opening 30, the game ball that has flowed down in the closed state (when closed) can be guided in an arbitrary direction (the second starting opening 21 described later) by the inclined upper surface passage. It will be possible. It should be noted that the first large winning opening 30 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state. That is, in the first large winning device 31 (first variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 32 causes the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball does not change. A second fixed winning device 25 including a variable third starting port 26 is provided. Random numbers for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct are acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct ( The second special symbol hit / fail judgment, the second hit / fail judgment) is executed, the second special symbol starts the variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. The game ball passage is branched below (downstream) of the first prize-winning opening 30 (upper and lower stages), and the upper game ball passage provided with the third starting port 26, the second starting opening 31 and the second starting opening 31 and the first. A lower side game ball passage in which the two major winning openings 35 are provided is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the game ball guided to the upper game ball passage enters the third start port 26 by contacting the game nail 16 provided in the vicinity of the third start port 26. Alternatively, the ball flows downstream without entering the third starting port 26 and flows into the out port 34. Further, since the third starting port 26 is a fixed winning device (ball entry port) capable of constantly entering a ball, it becomes a big hit in a left-handed game (so-called first hit), and the first big hit game is hit right. When executed in the game, the game ball can be entered (held) into the third start port 26 during the big hit game, and the variation display of the second special symbol can be executed immediately after the end of the big hit game.

In the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the first large winning opening 30, the ease of entering the game ball changes. A variable winning device 22 (also referred to as a “variable start port” or a “variable start port”) including the second start port 21 of the formula is provided. Based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not is acquired, and when a predetermined predetermined condition (variation start condition) is satisfied, the accuracy of the first special symbol is determined (first). (1) Special symbol hit / miss determination) is executed, the first special symbol starts variable display, and after a predetermined time elapses, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit / fail judgment.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23 (also referred to as an “opening / closing member”), and opens and closes the second starting port 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening / closing operation, the second starting port 21 can be changed from the first aspect (closed state) to the second aspect (open state) in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. is there. In the first embodiment, the second starting port 21 is capable of entering the game ball only when the movable member 23 is in the open state, and is unable to enter the game ball when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. There is. The second starting port 21 is perfect when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, as long as the game ball is more difficult to enter when the movable member 23 is in the closed state than when the game ball is in the open state. It does not have to be the one that makes it impossible to enter the ball.

Further, the movable member 23 is a game ball passage having a substantially rectangular (long plate shape) upper surface as in the opening / closing member 32, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second starting port 21 is closed and the movable member 23 is said to be closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the movable member 23. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the movable member 23 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 without entering the second starting port 21. It flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the movable member 23 is driven by the second starting port solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5), and the movable member 23 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The movable member 23 disappears from the entrance of the second starting port 21. As a result, when the movable member 23 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second starting port 21 enters the second starting port 21. In this way, the movable member 23 that opens and closes the entrance of the second starting port 21 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and when in the open state (when opened), the game ball that has flowed down can be seen. The ball is smoothly entered into the second starting port 21, and the game ball that has flowed down when the ball is closed (when closed) is allowed to flow down in an arbitrary direction by the inclined upper surface passage (second large winning opening 35 described later). Induce to.

In this way, in a state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. When the first special symbol is variablely displayed and the game ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the second special symbol is variablely displayed. Therefore, in the state where the game ball is launched into the right side area (right game area 3B) and the game is played (right-handed game), the game state (state B: low accuracy high) in which the game is mainly performed by the variable display of the first special symbol. It has a base state (high accuracy and high base state) and a gaming state (state C: high accuracy and low base state) in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol.

Further, in the game area on the right side (right game area 3B) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3 and below (downstream) the second starting port 21, a second large winning opening 35 is provided. A large winning device 36 (also referred to as a "second variable ball entrance") is provided. The second prize-winning device 36 includes an opening / closing member 37, and opens and closes the second prize-winning opening 35 by the operation of the opening / closing member 37. Like the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37 has a substantially rectangular (long plate-shaped) game ball passage on the upper surface, and in the closed state, the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 is closed and the opening / closing member 37 is opened / closed. The game ball can pass through the upper surface of the member 37. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 is formed so as to be inclined from the upstream side to the downstream side (from right to left on the paper surface). As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 passes through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 without entering the second large winning opening 35. Then, it flows down in the downstream direction of the game area.

Further, the opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (see FIG. 5), and the opening / closing member 37 retracts in the back surface direction of the game board 3 (perpendicular to the game board surface) to form a game ball passage. The opening / closing member 37 that had been used disappears from the entrance of the second large winning opening 35. As a result, when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance portion of the second special winning opening 35 will enter the second large winning opening 35. In this way, the opening / closing member 37 that opens / closes the entrance of the second special winning opening 35 is a retractable opening / closing member similar to the opening / closing member 32, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the open state (when opened). Is smoothly entered into the second large winning opening 35, and the game ball that has flowed down when in the closed state (when closed) is guided in an arbitrary direction (out opening 34) by the inclined upper surface passage. It becomes possible. It should be noted that the second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter only when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state. That is, in the second large winning device 36 (second variable ball entry port), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 37 causes the game ball to enter the ball in an inaccessible state (closed state) and the game ball to enter. It can be changed to a ball-enabled state (open state).

Further, in the game area below the left side area (left game area 3A) of the center decoration body 10 in the game area 3, a plurality (three) general ball entrances 27 are provided. The game area 3 in which various entrances and the like are arranged is divided into a left game area (first game area) 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area (second game area) 3B on the right side. Can be divided into. The method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called left-handed, and the method of launching the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called right-handed. .. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the normal state (low accuracy low base state, state A) at the start of the game is left-handed to aim at entering the first starting port 20. That is, the normal state at the start of the game is a left-handed game mainly in which the ball enters the first starting port 20 by left-handed (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct).

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the first starting port 20 (first special symbol hit / fail judgment), the big hit game and after the big hit game (special game) is completed (low accuracy, high base state, high accuracy). In the high base state or high accuracy low base state), right-handed to enter the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30, the second starting opening 21, the third starting opening 26, or the second big winning opening 35. It will be a game aiming at the ball. Specifically, when a big hit is made in a left-handed game, first, the big hit standby state is set, and the right-handed game is aimed at entering the gate 28. Next, when the ball enters the gate 28 (start gate 29) in the big hit standby state, the big hit game starts, and the right-handed game mainly aims at entering the first big winning opening 30.

Further, when the big hit game ends and the game state after the big hit game ends becomes the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state (state B), it mainly goes to the gate 28 (normal figure gate) and the second starting port 21. It will be a right-handed game aiming at entering the ball. On the other hand, when the big hit game ends and the game state after the big hit game ends is the high accuracy low base state (state C), the right-handed game aiming at entering the third start opening 26 and the second big winning opening 35 Become. That is, the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state (state B) are right-handed games mainly in which the ball enters the second starting port 21 by right-handed (first special symbol hit / miss judgment), and the high-accuracy is high. The low base state (state C) is a right-handed game in which the ball enters the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail determination) by right-handed hitting. As a result, even in the same right-handed game, the main starting port (target of the special symbol winning / failing determination) differs depending on the game state (state B or state C).

Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a second out port 34b is provided on the upstream side of the gate 28, and the game ball flowing into the game area downstream of the gate 28 of the right game area 3B. The amount can be adjusted (decreased). That is, the second out port 34b is installed on the upstream side of all the ball entry ports installed in the right game area 3B, and the game nails provided in the vicinity of the second out port 34b allow the ball entry ports to be opened. The rate of entry of game balls into the installation area (ratio of entry) can be adjusted. Further, in the right game area 3B (second game area), a third out port 34c is located downstream of the second starting port 21 and upstream of the second large winning opening 35, which is a large winning opening for small hits. Is provided. With this third out port 34c, the rate of entry of the game ball into the game area on the side of the second large winning opening 35 when a small hit occurs, that is, the rate of entry of the ball into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. It is adjustable. The game nails provided in the vicinity of the third out port 34c make it possible to adjust the ball entry rate (entry rate) of the game ball into the second major winning opening 35.

Then, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, the first large winning opening 30, the second large winning opening 35, and the general entering opening 27, each entry opening is used. A predetermined number of game balls (also referred to as "prize balls" and "game profits") are paid out (given) in. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls (amount of game profit) paid out based on the entry into the first large winning opening 30 is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35. It is set more than the number (amount of game profit). Specifically, the first big winning opening 30 pays out 15 prize balls for one winning ball, and the second big winning opening 35 pays out 10 prize balls for one winning ball. The prize ball is to be paid out.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, a main display 40 is arranged at the lower right of the game board 2. On the main display 40, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of the first special symbol, and the second special symbol display for variable display and stop display of the second special symbol are displayed. A device 41b (second special symbol display unit) and a normal symbol display 42 (ordinary symbol display unit) for variable display and stop display of a normal symbol (also referred to as "specific identification information") are included. Further, the main display 40 has a first special symbol hold indicator 43a for displaying the number of stored numbers of the hit / fail determination information (first special symbol hold) related to the first special symbol, and a hit / fail determination information (first) related to the second special symbol. Includes a second special figure hold indicator 43b that displays the number of stored items of 2 special figure hold) and a normal figure hold indicator 44 that displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. ing.

Further, the main display 40 has a hit indicator 48 indicating that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment is a hit, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. A round indicator 45 indicating the number of rounds of the winning game to be executed, a gaming state indicator 46 indicating that the probability variation function is activated, and a launching direction of the gaming ball, that is, the right A launch direction indicator 47 is included to indicate whether the ball should be hit or left. Further, the main display 40 includes a variable state indicator 49 indicating a variable state (c1) of the first special symbol, a variable state (c2) of the second special symbol, and a variable state (c3) of the normal symbol. There is. The various indicators included in these main indicators 40 are displayed and controlled by the main control unit described later.

The variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21. The variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the entry of the game ball into the third starting port 26. In the following description, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol. Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol display unit 41. Further, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b may be collectively referred to as a special figure holding display unit 43.

In the special symbol display unit 41, the special symbol (identification information) is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time and then stopped, and the special symbol (stop symbol) displayed as a stop is displayed to display the first start port 20 and the second start port 20. The result of the hit / fail judgment (special symbol hit / fail judgment, big hit lottery) based on the entry into the 21 or the third starting port 26 is notified. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct. When the stop symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (specific identification information) (that is, when it is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol), it is an open pattern according to the type of the specific special symbol displayed as a stop. A special game (big hit game, small hit game) that opens the 1st big winning opening 30 or the 2nd big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30 and / or second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "ip", and a special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is displayed. indicate. For example, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is the 15R first big hit, the three LEDs of "ijn" are turned on and the rest are turned off. When the 4R second big hit is reached, the four LEDs of "jnkl" are turned on and the rest are turned off. In addition, when it comes off, the two LEDs of "lo" can be turned on and the rest can be turned off. Further, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and displays a special symbol according to the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination. Similar to the first special symbol display 41b, the stop display mode is defined in a different display mode depending on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination (big hit, small hit, miss). Further, before the special symbol is stopped and displayed (before the derivation display), the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time, and the mode of the fluctuation display is, for example, from left to right in a predetermined order. Each LED can be turned on so that light flows repeatedly to the light.

As described above, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are each composed of a plurality of LEDs (display units), and during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 41a A plurality of LEDs corresponding to are lit (blinking) in a predetermined order, and when the fluctuation time elapses, the first special symbol corresponding to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is displayed by the jackpot type (one mode if one type). ), Small hit type (1 mode if 1 type) and off type (1 mode if 1 type) are stopped and displayed.

Further, the fluctuation state display 49 includes a display unit c1 (LEDc1), a display unit c2 (LEDc2), and a display unit c3 (LEDc3), and the display unit c1 indicates the fluctuation state of the first special symbol, and the display unit. The fluctuating state of the second special symbol is indicated by c2, and the fluctuating state of the normal symbol is indicated by the display unit c3. Specifically, the display unit c1 indicating the fluctuation state of the first special symbol is composed of one LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the first special symbol display 41a. Has been done. Then, during the variable display of the first special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variable time of the first special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, in the case of a miss, the light is turned off and the stop is displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the stop is displayed in red regardless of the big hit type. In addition, when the variation display of the first special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c1 is displayed in blinking during the fluctuation display of the first special symbol, is displayed in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is displayed in red when the jackpot symbol is stopped, and is stopped in the off symbol. Is turned off (hidden). Thereby, by looking at the display unit c1 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the first special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the first special symbol display 41a, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c1) functions as a second first special symbol display 41a. Note that "interruption of variable display" is a process that can be performed when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol (second special symbol) executed at the same time is a big hit, and the variable display is temporarily interrupted. Then, after the cancellation condition is satisfied, the variable display is restarted.

Further, the display unit c2 indicating the fluctuation state of the second special symbol is, like the display unit c1, one LED (display unit, display) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display) than the second special symbol display 41b. It is composed of a display unit). Then, during the variation display of the second special symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the variation time of the second special symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination. Specifically, if it is off, it will be turned off and stopped, if it is a big hit, it will be stopped and displayed in red regardless of the big hit type, and if it is a small hit, it will be turned on in green regardless of the small hit type (small hit mode). Stop display with. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c2 is displayed blinking during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, is lit in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit in red while the jackpot symbol is stopped, and is stopped by the small hit symbol. The inside is lit in green, and the off symbol is turned off (hidden) while it is stopped. Thereby, by looking at the display unit c2 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (changing, interrupting, stopping, hit / fail determination result) of the second special symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the second special symbol display 41b, it is difficult to grasp the jackpot type in detail, but the variable state is present. Can be easily grasped. Further, the variable state display 49 (display unit c2) functions as a second second special symbol display 41b.

The display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c1 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state symbol" or a "first sub-symbol". Further, since the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c1, it is also referred to as "first confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". Further, the display mode (symbol) displayed on the display unit c2 is also referred to as a "second state symbol" or a "second sub symbol". Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination can be confirmed from the stop mode of the display unit c2, it is also referred to as "second confirmation symbol (also simply referred to as" confirmation symbol ")". Further, the first state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the second state symbol corresponds to the variation display and the stop display of the second special symbol. Variable display and stop display are displayed. Therefore, if the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol is wrong, the first state symbol is turned off (off mode) and stopped and displayed, and in the case of a big hit, all are lit in red regardless of the big hit type (big hit mode). Stop display with. The relationship between the second special symbol and the second state symbol is also the same.

Further, the display unit c3 indicating the fluctuation state of the normal symbol is a single LED (display unit) which is a smaller number of LEDs (display unit, display unit) than the normal symbol display 42, similarly to the display unit c1. It is configured. Then, during the variable display of the normal symbol, the blinking display is performed, and when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol elapses, the stop display is performed in the display mode according to the result of the normal symbol hit / miss determination. Specifically, if it is off, it is turned off and stopped, and if it is hit, it is turned on in red regardless of the hit type. In addition, when the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is interrupted (paused), it is stopped and displayed in yellow.

Therefore, the display unit c3 is displayed blinking while the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed, is lit in yellow while the fluctuation display is interrupted, is lit in red when the hit symbol is stopped, and is turned off when the off symbol is stopped. (Hidden). As a result, by looking at the display unit c3 of the fluctuation state display 49, it is possible to grasp the fluctuation state (during, interrupted, stopped, hit / fail determination result) of the normal symbol. Further, since the variable state indicator 49 has a simpler configuration (the number of indicators is small) than the normal symbol display 42, it is difficult to grasp the hit type in detail, but the variable state is easy. It becomes possible to grasp.

The display mode (design) displayed on the display unit c3 of the variable state display 49 is also referred to as a "first state normal symbol" or a "first sub-normal symbol". In addition, the first state normal symbol displays fluctuation and stop corresponding to the fluctuation display and stop display of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is wrong, the light is turned off (the hit mode) and the stop is displayed, and if the hit is the hit type, the red light is turned on (the hit mode).

In this embodiment, a special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and a variable state display 49 are provided, and the variable state of the special symbol can be grasped by any of them. , When any LED of the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) having a large number of LEDs capable of grasping the fluctuation state in detail fails (damage, disconnection, etc.) However, the fluctuation state indicator 49 makes it possible to grasp the approximate fluctuation state. The same applies to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable state display 49. Further, in the present embodiment, the display control of both the special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) and the variable state display 49 is performed by the main control unit.

Here, among the stop display modes of the special symbol and the effect symbol (display result of the variable display), the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a hit (big hit or small hit) is referred to as "hit mode". , "Specific mode", "Specific display mode" or "Specific display result", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is out of order is referred to as "off mode" or "non-specific mode". , "Non-specific display mode" or "non-specific display result". Further, the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit is also referred to as a "big hit mode" or a "big hit symbol", and the stop display mode corresponding to the case where the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is a small hit. This is also called a "small hit mode" or a "small hit symbol". Further, it refers to any or all of the image display device, the first special symbol display 41a (first special symbol display unit), the second special symbol display 41b (second special symbol display unit), and the special symbol display unit 41. It is also called "variable display means" or "identification information display means".

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26, various types of special symbol hit / fail determination random numbers and the like are based on the entry. Information (also referred to as “acquired information”) is acquired, and the acquired various information is temporarily stored in the special figure holding storage unit 85 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Specifically, if the information is acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, it is stored as the first special figure hold (also referred to as "first acquisition information"). If the information is stored in the unit 85a and acquired based on the entry into the third starting port 26, it is stored in the second special figure holding storage unit 85b as the second special figure reservation (also referred to as "second acquisition information"). Will be done. An upper limit is set for the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage unit 85, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four each. The first special figure reservation storage unit 85a and the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b are also referred to as "first acquisition information storage means" and "second acquisition information storage means", respectively, and are also generally referred to as "acquisition information storage means". ..

The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage unit 85 is digested when the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the special symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not corresponding to the special symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the special symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20, the second start port 21, or the third start port 26 cannot be immediately executed at the time of the entry. That is, during the execution of the variable display of each special symbol or the execution of the special game based on any of the special symbol hit / fail judgments, the special symbol hit / fail judgment for the entry is made up to a predetermined number (4 each). It is possible to reserve (hold) the right of.

The number of such special figure hold indicators is displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a and the second special figure hold indicator 43b. Specifically, the first special figure hold indicator 43a is composed of two LEDs of "uv", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the first special figure hold, the first special figure is held. It displays the number of holds. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "u □ v □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned off and the LED of v is turned on in red, such as “u □ v ●”. Further, when the number of holds is 2, the display mode can be such that the LED of u is turned on in red and the LED of v is turned off, such as “u ● v □”. Further, when the number of holds is 3, the display mode can be such that both LEDs are lit in red, such as "u ● v ●". Further, when the number of holdings is 4 (upper limit number), both LEDs can be turned on in green as in "u ▲ v ▲" to set the display mode. Further, the second special figure hold indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs of "wx", and by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of the second special figure hold, the second special figure hold is held. It displays a number. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "w □ x □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds 1 to 1 No. 4 is also defined in the same manner as the first special figure holding indicator 43a.

The variation display of the normal symbol is performed based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28 (detection by the gate sensor 28a). In the normal symbol display 42, after displaying the normal symbol fluctuating for a predetermined time, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and the result of the normal symbol hit / fail determination based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is determined by the stopped display normal symbol (stop symbol). Notify. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the judgment of whether or not the normal symbol is correct. When the stop-displayed normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (hit normal symbol), an auxiliary game (“specific game”” in which the second starting port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. Also called) is performed. Further, the means (main control unit) for executing the auxiliary game (specific game) is also referred to as the auxiliary game execution means (specific game execution means). The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, the normal symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs of "st", and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol hit / fail judgment depending on the lighting mode. Is. For example, when the determination result is a hit, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed when both LEDs are lit, such as "s ■ t ■" (for example, ■: lit, □: turned off). Further, when the determination result is out of order, an out-of-order normal symbol in a mode in which only the t LED is lit, such as "s □ t ■", is displayed. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is executed for a predetermined fluctuation time. The variation display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs are alternately turned on and off.

When the game ball passes through the gate 28, the pachinko gaming machine 1 acquires various information (also referred to as “acquired information”) such as random numbers for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct based on the passage of the game ball, and the acquired various information. Is temporarily stored as a normal figure hold in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage unit 86, and the upper limit value in the first embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage unit 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not corresponding to the normal symbol hold, and to execute the variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of passing, that is, during the execution of the variation display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Can reserve (hold) the right to judge whether or not a normal symbol is correct for the passage of a predetermined number of cards.

The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. Specifically, the normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of two LEDs of "qr", and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs according to the number of normal figure hold. For example, when the number of holds is 0, both LEDs are turned off, such as "q □ r □" (for example, □: off, ●: red, ▲: green), and the number of holds is 1. In the case of, the display mode can be such that the LED of q is turned off and the LED of r is turned on in red as in "q □ r ●". Further, the number of hold numbers 2 to 4 is also defined in the same manner as in the first special figure hold indicator 43a.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 5. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a main control board 80 (“main control unit” or “main control unit”) that controls game profits such as special symbol winning / failing determination, normal symbol winning / failing determination, and transition of game state. (Also referred to as "game control unit"), sub-control board 90 (also referred to as "sub-control unit", "sub-control unit", or "effect control unit") that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and a game ball. The payout control board 110 (also referred to as “payout control unit”) that controls the payout, the effect symbol 8 displayed on the image display device 7, the pattern displayed on the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, It also includes an image control board 100 (image control unit) that controls the display of the fourth effect hold display 103b and the like. As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case containing the main control board 80 is provided in a substantially central portion on the rear surface side (back surface side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and above the main control board case, An image control board storage case containing the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100 is provided, and a sub control board storage case containing the sub control board 90 is provided on the image control board storage case. It is provided. Further, a payout control board case for accommodating the payout control board is provided on the lower left side of the main control board case, and a power supply board case for accommodating the power supply board 109 is provided on the right side thereof.

A game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter, “game control microcomputer”) 81 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main control board 80. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data (information) to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 87 (I / O port unit). The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81. Further, the ROM may be externally attached. The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the above-described special figure holding storage unit 85 (first special figure holding storage unit 85a and second special figure holding storage unit 85b) and the normal drawing holding storage unit 86. ..

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input to the main control board 80 from each sensor, and signals are output to each solenoid from the main control board 80. Specifically, as the sensors, the first start port sensor 20a, the second start port sensor 21a, the third start port sensor 26a, the gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a), the first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second The large winning opening sensor 35a and the general entry opening sensor 27a are connected. These various sensors are also referred to as "detection means".

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 21. The third start port sensor 26a is provided in the third start port 26 and detects a game ball that has entered the third start port 26. The gate sensor 28a (start gate sensor 29a) is provided in the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided in the first large winning opening 30 and detects a game ball that has entered the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided in the second large winning opening 35 and detects a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 35. The general ball entry sensor 27a is provided in each general ball entry port 27 and detects a game ball that has entered the general ball entry port 27.

Further, as the solenoids, the second starting port solenoid 24, the first winning opening solenoid 33, and the second winning opening solenoid 38 are connected. The second starting port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22. The first grand prize opening solenoid 33 is for driving the opening / closing member 32 of the first grand prize device 31. The second grand prize opening solenoid 38 is for driving the opening / closing member 37 of the second grand prize device 36. Further, on the main control board 80, a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and the like are commonly used. Figure Hold indicator 44, variable state indicator 49, round indicator 45, game status indicator 46, launch direction indicator 47, and hit indicator 48 are connected. That is, the display control of these main indicators 40 is performed by the game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80).

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. A payout device 120 for paying out prize balls and rental balls and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via a launch control board 111 (also referred to as a “launch control unit”). Is connected. The launcher 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1). The card unit 135 is installed adjacent to one end side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (usually on the left side of the paper in FIG. 1), and the player performs a predetermined ball lending operation to insert a prepaid card (game). It enables ball lending based on the information stored in the value storage medium) or the like.

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer 116 (also referred to as a “payout control microcomputer”) that controls payout of game balls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. The payout control microcomputer 116 uses the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81 and the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko gaming machine 1 via the input / output circuit 117. It drives and pays out prize balls and pays out rental balls. The game balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 for counting. When the player operates the handle 60 of the launching device 112 (see FIG. 1), the touch switch 114 detects the player's contact with the firing handle 60, and the firing volume 115 is the firing handle 60. Detects the amount of rotation. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven and controlled so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

Further, the main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional (one-way) communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90. Further, as shown in FIG. 5, a one-chip microcomputer 91 for effect control (“microcomputer for effect control”) that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the sub-control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores a program for controlling the game effect as the game progresses, a RAM that is used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes a program stored in the ROM. There is. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via the input / output circuit 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. Further, the ROM may be externally attached.

The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 are connected to the sub control board 90. The effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 is used in the CPU (VDP) of the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 (“image control microcomputer”) of the image control board 100 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Image display device 7 (first image display device), second image display device 71, third image display device 72, effect display 102, third effect hold display 103a, and fourth effect hold display 103b. Let them control. The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for developing image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including production symbols, reserved symbols, etc.). Image data such as a background image is stored. The CPU (VDP) of the image control board 100 reads image data from the ROM based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91. Then, the display control is executed based on the read image data.

The effect display 102 is composed of two LEDs, one of which performs a variable display and a stop display in accordance with the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol, and the other LED displays the variable display of the second special symbol. A display mode in which a variable display and a stop display are performed in accordance with the stop display, and the display result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (result of the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct) is shown by turning on / off the corresponding LED or by color. Stop display with. Similarly, the third effect hold indicator 103a and the fourth effect hold indicator 103b also consist of two LEDs, respectively. Then, by turning on / off the two LEDs or combining colors, the third effect hold display 103a is displayed by the number of holds displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c and the first special figure hold display 43a. The display is controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds as the number of holds. Further, the fourth effect hold display 103b is display-controlled in a display mode showing the same number of holds displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d and the same number of holds displayed by the second special figure hold display 43b. To.

The character symbol is displayed on a part or substantially the entire display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit), or the movable decorative member 14 is operated in front of the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit) to display the display screen 7a (effect symbol display unit). By covering a part or substantially the entire part), a part or all of the effect symbol 8, the first effect hold display unit 9c, or the second effect hold display unit 9d may be invisible. is there. Even when such a covering state is reached, these effect display 102, the third effect hold indicator 103a, and so on, so that the variation display and stop display of the effect symbol, the number of hold items, and the like can be surely confirmed. A fourth effect holding indicator 103b is provided. It should be noted that the display modes of the effect display 102, the third effect hold display 103a, and the fourth effect hold display 103b are always visible without being hindered by the operation of the movable decorative member 14. It has become. Further, a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided in place of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 outputs voice, music, sound effects, and the like from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. A CPU may be mounted on the voice control board 106, and in that case, the CPU may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the voice control board 106, or the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines the light emission pattern data (lighting / extinguishing, light emitting color, etc.) of the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 based on the command received from the main control board 80. , Also referred to as lamp data) is determined from the data stored in the ROM, and lighting control of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 is performed via the lamp control board 107.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 operates the movable decorative member 14 connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on the command received from the main control board 80. Although only a part of the movable decorative member 14 is visible in FIG. 1, it is a movable so-called gimmick (movable member) provided in the center decorative body 10. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines operation pattern data (also referred to as “drive data”) for operating the movable decorative member 14 in a predetermined operation mode from the data stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. The operation of the movable decorative member 14 is controlled based on the determined operation pattern data. A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and in that case, the CPU may execute lamp lighting control or operation control of the movable decorative member 14. Further, in this case, the ROM may be mounted on the lamp control board 107, and the data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

Further, on the sub-control board 90, the first effect button detection switch 63c and the first effect button detection switch 63c for detecting that the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.) 2 The effect button detection switch 63d is connected. Therefore, when the player performs a predetermined input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal is output from the corresponding effect button detection switch to the sub-control board 90.

Next, the control related to the determination of whether or not the special symbol is correct in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. As a result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, it has "big hit", "small hit", and "missing". At the time of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. The jackpot symbol (specific display result) is predetermined according to the type of jackpot described later (see FIG. 6). In the case of "small hit", the "small hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. Further, in the case of "off", the "off symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display unit 41. When it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a "special game" is executed in which the first big winning opening 30 or the second big winning opening 35 is opened with an opening pattern according to the type of the special symbol displayed as stopped. .. A special game executed as a big hit is called a "big hit game", and a special game executed as a small hit is called a "small hit game".

There are a plurality of types of hits, and the hit type corresponding to the result (specific result) is executed according to the result (specific result) of the special symbol winning / failing determination. That is, different hit types (big hits) depending on whether the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment is the first specific result, the second specific result, the third specific result, another specific result, or the like. , Including small hits). In addition, the special game to be executed may differ depending on the hit type, and the amount of game profit that can be obtained differs depending on the special game, or the game state after the special game ends may differ. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, the types of hits are "15R (round) 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", and "15Rth". There are "5 big hits", "2R 6th big hits", and "2R 7th big hits". In "15R 1st jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 15 times. Further, in "4R 2nd big hit", "4R 3rd big hit", and "4R 4th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 4 times. In "2R 6th big hit" and "2R 7th big hit", the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is 2 times. In this way, in the big hit, the first big winning opening 30 is opened and the second big winning opening 35 is not opened. For this reason, the first big winning opening 30 is also referred to as a "big hit big winning opening (big hit variable ball opening)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", and "2R 6th jackpot" indicate the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game. , Move to the high probability state described later (activate the probability change function). Therefore, these five types of jackpots are also referred to as "probability variation jackpots (high probability jackpots)". This high probability state (probability change function) continues until the next big hit occurs. Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" shift the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game to the low probability state described later (the probability variation function is not activated). Therefore, these two types of jackpots are also referred to as "low probability jackpots (low probability jackpots, normal jackpots)".

In addition, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot" set the variation time of the 2nd special symbol to a short time after the end of the jackpot game, "2nd special symbol time reduction". Activate "function" and do not activate high base generation function. As a result, the gaming state after the end of these jackpot games becomes a high-accuracy low-base state (state C). This high accuracy and low base state continues until the next big hit occurs. In this high accuracy low base state, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is longer than that of the low accuracy low base state, the low accuracy high base state, and the high accuracy high base state. It is set. In particular, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is incorrect, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (see FIG. 9).

The game playability in the high-accuracy low-base state (state C) will be described in detail later, but as described above, the third start is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B in which various entrances are arranged. Let the ball enter the mouth 26. Then, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is performed, a small hit is generated, and the game ball can be increased in the period between the previous big hit and the next big hit (between the big hits). In addition, by making small hits occur frequently in the high accuracy and low base state during the big hits, it can be expected that many game balls will be acquired in a short period of time by the small hits. That is, it is an advantageous period for the player, and it is a period in which it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the "4R 4th jackpot" and the "2R 7th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. Due to the operation of the first special symbol time reduction function, the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol is shorter than that when the first special symbol time reduction function is not activated (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy low base state). Set to time. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a low accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 4th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", the low accuracy high base state ends based on the occurrence of the next jackpot or the execution of the variation display of the special symbol 100 times. .. When the change display of the special symbol ends based on being executed 100 times, the gaming state is set to the low probability low base state (normal state). Further, as will be described in detail later, in the low accuracy and high base state, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is performed by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B where various entrances are arranged as described above, and then the next It is a period in which the game is played in anticipation of the occurrence of a big hit.

In addition, the "4R 3rd jackpot" and the "2R 6th jackpot" activate the "first special symbol time saving function" and the "high base generation function" after the jackpot game is completed. Since the second special symbol time saving function is not activated, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol. As a result, the game state after the end of these big hit games becomes a high accuracy and high base state. In the case of "4R 3rd jackpot" and "2R 6th jackpot", the "1st special symbol time saving function" and "high base generation function" continue until the next jackpot occurs. Also, as mentioned above, the "probability change function" will continue until the next big hit occurs. That is, in the case of "4R 3rd big hit" and "2R 6th big hit", after the big hit game is completed, the high accuracy high base state (first special symbol time saving state) is set until the next big hit occurs.

In the high-accuracy high-base state, as in the low-accuracy high-base state, by performing a right-handed game in the right game area 3B, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made, and the game is expected to occur in the next big hit. As mentioned above, the high-accuracy and low-base state is a period to be performed, and as described above, many game balls are played in a short period of time by making small hits frequently while executing the second special symbol hit / fail judgment by right-handed games. It is a favorable period for the player, who can also expect to acquire. It should be noted that there are more game balls that can be acquired in the high accuracy and low base state than those that can be acquired in the high accuracy and high base state.

In addition, the high accuracy high base state after the end of the big hit game (4R 3rd big hit game) related to "4R 3rd big hit" and the low after the end of the big hit game (4R 4th big hit game) related to "4R 4th big hit". By executing a common game effect (first game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the highly accurate base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to non-notification states that do not notify the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) (make it difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "4R 3rd jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "4R 4th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the game interest. In the low-accuracy high-base state and the high-accuracy high-base state, that is, in the high-base state, the player does not reduce the number of balls held so much (when the rate of decrease of the balls held is slower than in the low-accuracy low-base state). It can be performed.

Similarly, after the end of the big hit game (2R 6th big hit game) related to "2R 6th big hit" and the high accuracy high base state, and after the end of the big hit game (2R 7th big hit game) related to "2R 7th big hit". By executing a common game effect (second game effect: background, game mode, character pattern, reach effect, etc.) in the low accuracy and high base state, it is difficult for the player to recognize which game state. To do. As shown in FIG. 9, these gaming states are set as the state B, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the common fluctuation pattern determination table. As a result, both game states are set to non-notification states that do not notify the game state (high accuracy high base state or low accuracy high base state) (make it difficult to recognize).

When the type of jackpot was "2R 6th jackpot", the high accuracy and high base state continued even after the variation display of the special symbol had passed 100 times, and it was "2R 7th jackpot". In this case, the gaming state becomes a low-probability low-base state (a normal state disadvantageous to the player) after 100 times of variable display of the special symbol has elapsed. Therefore, in this non-notification state, the player plays with the expectation that the high-accuracy and high-base state will continue even after 100 times have passed, regardless of the game state, and enhances the game interest.

Here, the jackpots of "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot" and "2R 7th jackpot", which are the jackpots in which the game state after the end of the jackpot game is the state B, respectively. The design is also called the "first specific display result", and the game state after the end of the big hit game is the big hit "15R 1st big hit", "4R 2nd big hit" and "15R 5th big hit". Each of the jackpot symbols is also referred to as a "second specific display result".

In addition, as for the small hits that can occur as a result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment, the number of times the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is opened is set to six times, and one time (and) compared to other big hits. The opening time of (total) is also set short. Specifically, the opening is performed 6 times for 0.3 seconds for a total of 1.8 seconds. Therefore, as compared with the big hit game (for example, the 15R first big hit game, the 4R fourth big hit game, etc.), the number of game balls that can be obtained in one small hit game is set to be smaller. However, in the high accuracy and low base state between the big hits, by generating the small hits a plurality of times (many times), it is possible to execute the small hit games a plurality of times and acquire more game balls. In addition, in all small hits, the second big winning opening 35 is opened, and the first big winning opening 30 is not opened. For this reason, the second large winning opening 35 is also referred to as a "small hit large winning opening (small hit variable entry opening)". In the small hit (small hit game), unlike the big hit (big hit game), the number of times the big winning opening is opened is not called the number of rounds, but simply the number of times opened. In addition, the probability variation function does not operate based on the occurrence of small hits, and if the game state at the time of small hit occurrence is a high probability state, it is considered to be a high probability state even after the small hit game ends, and when a small hit occurs. If the game state of is a low probability state, it is considered to be a low probability state even after the small hit game is completed. Similarly, the time saving function and the high base generation function of the second special symbol are not activated based on the occurrence of small hits.

In addition, the distribution probability to each jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 20% for the 15R first jackpot, 10% for the 4R second jackpot, 35% for the 4R third jackpot, and the 4R first jackpot. The 4 jackpots are 35%. On the other hand, the jackpot in the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 50% for the 15R fifth jackpot, 15% for the 2R sixth jackpot, and 35% for the 2R seventh jackpot. That is, if a big hit is obtained by the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the third starting port 26 (the second special symbol hit / fail judgment) in which the fluctuation frequency is improved by the operation of the second special symbol time saving function described later, 15R It becomes a big hit (15R 5th big hit), and a large amount of game balls can be acquired in a short period of time. As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the hit / fail judgment (first special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed by entering the game ball into the first start port 20 or the second start port 21 is not a big hit. 3 It is highly possible that a big hit is advantageous for the player (a large amount of game balls can be obtained) in the hit / fail judgment (second special symbol hit / fail judgment) performed when the game ball enters the starting port 26. It is set to be. In addition, the player plays the game in anticipation of the occurrence of the 15R fifth big hit and the occurrence of a high-accuracy low-base state in which the game ball can be increased by the small hit.

Here, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the determination of whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a miss is performed based on a "special symbol hit / miss judgment random number (also referred to as" hit / miss judgment information ")", and when it becomes a big hit The determination of the type of jackpot is performed based on the "random number for determining the jackpot type (also referred to as" random number for determining symbol "and" information for determining symbol ")". It should be noted that the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit. As shown in FIG. 7A, the random number for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct takes a value in the range of 0 to 629. The random number for determining the jackpot type takes a value in the range of 0 to 99. The random numbers (acquisition information) acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20, the second starting port 21, or the third starting port 26 include a random number for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not and a random number for determining the jackpot type. In addition, there is a "variable pattern random number (also referred to as" variable pattern information ")". Further, the fluctuation pattern random number is a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (variation mode) including the fluctuation time of the special symbol. The variation pattern random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 198. Further, the random numbers acquired based on the passage of the gate 28 include the normal symbol hit / miss determination random numbers shown in FIG. 7 (B). The normal symbol hit / miss determination random number is a random number for determining whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the second starting port 21 (normal symbol hit / miss determination). Ordinary symbol random numbers take a value in the range of 0 to 240.

Next, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, each function of the probability variation function (probability variation function) for the special symbol and the normal symbol, the variation time shortening function for the special symbol and the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the second starting port 21 is in the operating state or not. It has a plurality of gaming states depending on the combination of operating states. For special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated is referred to as a "high probability state", and the state in which the probability fluctuation function is not activated is referred to as a "low probability state". In the high probability state (big hit probability: 1/63), the probability of being determined as a big hit in the special symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low probability state (big hit probability: 1/315). That is, in the low-probability state, the hit / fail judgment is performed using the jackpot judgment table for the low-probability state, but in the high-probability state, the jackpot judgment for the high-probability state in which the value of the special symbol hit / fail judgment random number judged to be a jackpot is large A hit / fail judgment is made using the table (see FIG. 8 (A)). That is, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the variation display of the special symbol will be a big hit (the stop symbol will be the jackpot symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. The means (main control unit) for setting a high probability or a low probability as the probability of determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (big hit probability) is called a "probability setting means".

Further, for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol), the state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is operating is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the special symbol is not operating is referred to as a "non-time saving state". In the time saving state, the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the confirmation display time) is shorter than the average value of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the non-time saving state. That is, in the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table defined so that the fluctuation pattern having the short fluctuation time is selected more often than in the non-time saving state (see FIG. 9). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and effective ball entry into the starting port (ball entry that can be stored as special figure hold) is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the length of the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is particularly related to the advantages and disadvantages of the player, it is set as the "second special symbol time saving function" as shown in FIG. There is. State A (low accuracy low base state) and state B (low accuracy high base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state in which the second special symbol time saving function is not operating, that is, a state mainly in determining whether the first special symbol is correct or not. , High accuracy and high base state). In the state A (low probability low base state), when the player performs a right-handed game and puts the game ball into the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is executed. Is displayed in a variable manner. However, since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol in the state A is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for the big hit, 1000 seconds for the small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly (such a state). Is also referred to as "first condition state"). Since the base is low (first game state), it is impossible or difficult to enter the second starting port 21.

Therefore, even if the right-handed game is performed in the state A, it is difficult for the player to acquire a large number of game balls. Therefore, in the state A, the game is advanced in the left-handed game aiming at the first starting port 20 in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is set to an appropriate length. On the other hand, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a gaming machine capable of simultaneously (parallel) executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. Even if the second special symbol is erroneously displayed in a variable state in the state A, the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 20 without waiting for the variable display of the second special symbol to end. , The first special symbol can be displayed in a variable manner.

On the other hand, in the state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), since the high base state (second game state) and the first special symbol time saving function is operating, the right-handed game is performed. As a result, it is possible to enter both the second starting port 21 and the third starting port 26 which have been opened. In the state B, as in the state A, the second special symbol time saving function is not operating. Therefore, when the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the variable time of the second special symbol is a very long time. Since it is set to (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit, 1000 seconds for small hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. However, when the ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, by operating the first special symbol time saving function, the first special symbol time saving state is set, and the first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed more frequently than the state A, and the game can proceed smoothly.

In addition, it has a state C (high accuracy and low base state) shown in FIG. 9 as a state mainly for determining whether or not the second special symbol is correct. In state C (high accuracy and low base state), since the second special symbol time saving function is activated, it is possible to play a game aiming at entering the third starting port 26 by performing a right-handed game. It becomes. When the ball enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the operation of the second special symbol time saving function sets the second special symbol time saving state, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed more frequently than the states A and B, and the game proceeds smoothly. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to execute the second special symbol winning / failing determination, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol winning / failing determination.

In the state C, when the ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss judgment is executed and the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, but the first special symbol is displayed. Since the fluctuation time of the symbol is set to a very long time (600 seconds off, 110 seconds for big hit), the game cannot proceed smoothly. Therefore, in the state C, even if the ball is entered into the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, or if there is a hold memory related to the first special symbol winning / failing determination, the second special symbol winning / failing determination is performed. It is possible to reduce as much as possible the possibility that the disadvantageous first special symbol winning / failing determination is executed.

As described above, although the state B and the state C are both states in which the right-handed game is performed, in the state B, as in the state C, the game state in which the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed is set, and the state C is performed. Then, it is regarded as a game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed. As a result, it becomes a big hit in the normal state (low probability low base state, state A) in which the left-handed game is performed, and in the so-called consecutive villa period (right-handed state) after shifting to the right-handed game, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. The game is diversified by shifting between the game state in which the game is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol winning / failing judgment is mainly performed. In addition, since the game state in which the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed and the game state in which the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is mainly performed have different types of jackpots (big hit games) that can occur, right-handed strikes. During the continuation of the game, different big hits (big hit games) are generated by the transition of these game states. This makes it possible to prevent the game from getting bored and enhance the game's interest.

Further, when the second special symbol time saving function is activated, that is, in the state C shown in FIG. 9 (such a state is also referred to as a "second condition state"), as shown in FIG. 9, the second Since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is short, the player can play the right-handed game smoothly without reducing the number of balls held compared to the left-handed game (second special symbol hit / fail judgment, first). 2 It is possible to execute a special symbol variable game). Further, in this embodiment, the first special symbol time saving function is not activated during the period when the second special symbol time saving function is operating (the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is made longer than the normal state). However, the first special symbol time saving function may be activated. Further, in the state B, the holding ball is maintained or slightly decreased, and in the state C, it is increased.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function (first special symbol time reduction function or second special symbol time reduction function) for the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) operate at the same time. Then, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function for the normal symbol operate in synchronization with the high base generation function. That is, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol operate in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) in the game state, and the low base state (low accuracy low base state, high accuracy). It does not work in the low base state). Therefore, in the high base state (state B), the hit probability in the normal symbol winning / failing determination is higher than in the low base state (also referred to as "general figure high probability state"). That is, in the high base state (state B), the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) determined to be a hit is larger than that of the normal symbol hit determination table used in the low base state (states A and C). Using the normal symbol hit determination table, the normal symbol hit / fail judgment (determination of the normal symbol) is performed (see FIG. 8C). That is, when the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol display 42 is activated, the probability that the result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be a hit (the stop symbol will be a normal hit symbol) will be higher than when it is not activated. ..

Further, in the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the low base state. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 3 seconds in the low base state, but is 1 second in the high base state (see FIG. 8 (E)). Further, in the high base state, the opening time of the second starting port 21 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the low base state. That is, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 is operating. Specifically, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the low base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 performs the opening operation for 0.9 seconds three times (opening time: 2.7 seconds) to open. The second starting port is opened during the period of operation. Further, when the result of the normal symbol winning / failing determination is successful in the high base state, the opening / closing member 37 of the variable winning device 22 is assumed to perform the opening operation of 6.0 seconds once (opening time: 6.0 seconds). .. Further, the closing time between the opening operations in the low base state is set to 0.1 seconds. In this embodiment, the number of opening operations of the opening / closing member 37 is different between the low base state and the high base state, but the number of opening operations may be the same. For example, the opening operation in the low base state may be set to open once for 2.7 seconds, or the opening operation in the high base state may be set to open three times for 2.0 seconds. Further, the opening operation in the high base state may be set to 6 times of 1.0 seconds, which may be larger than the number of times of opening in the low base state. Such a case is also referred to as an operation of increasing the number of times the variable winning device 22 is opened.

In the high base state, the probability fluctuation function for the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 are activated, so that these functions are not activated in the low base state. , The period in which the second starting port 21 is open becomes longer (the opening time per unit time becomes longer), and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port 21 becomes higher (also referred to as "high frequency state"). ). As a result, the execution frequency of the first special symbol winning / failing determination becomes high. As described above, in the high base state, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls on hand.

Further, if the opening time is the same, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the game ball passes through the second starting port 21 when the number of opening times is small. In this embodiment, the opening mode of the second starting port 21 in the high base state is set to open once for 6.0 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time (1 second). Since the second starting port 21 is closed during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the game ball starts to flow down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 in the closed state during the fluctuation time of the normal symbol. The time is set so that the movable member 23 of the second starting port 21 opens before passing through the upper surface. When the movable member 23 is in the open state while flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 in the closed state, the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 enters the second starting port 21 in the open state. Further, in order to prevent the game ball flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 from passing over the upper surface of the movable member 23, the material constituting the upper surface (game ball passage) of the movable member 23 is used for the game on the front side thereof. The material has a higher coefficient of friction than the material that makes up the ball passage (the material is different).

As a result, the speed at which the game ball flows down on the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set to be slower than the game rapid flow or speed of the game ball passage on the front side thereof. Further, as a mode for reducing the flow-down speed, the inclination angle may be loosened, or an inhibitory member (projection or the like) for reducing the flow-down speed may be provided. As a result, in the high base state, the game ball that has flowed down to the second starting port 21 does not enter the second starting port 21 (flows down the upper surface of the movable member 23), and the second big winning opening. The possibility of flowing down to 35 is further reduced. That is, in the high base state, even if a small hit occurs and the second large winning opening 35 is in the open state (ball entry possible state), the flowing game ball enters the second starting opening 21 and the second ball is entered. It is difficult to enter the big winning opening 35. In addition, the third out opening 34c can also prevent the game ball that has flowed down to the second large winning opening 35 from entering the second large winning opening 35.

The high base state does not have to activate all of the above functions. That is, by operating at least one of the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol, the second starting port is more than when the function is not operating. It suffices if 21 is easily opened (the frequency of ball entry is high). Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state of the special symbol. A function that generates such a high base state is called a "high base generation function".

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol is more advantageous to the player than the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol, so that the player selects the first special symbol. There is a possibility that the second special symbol will be displayed in a variable manner without being displayed in a variable manner. That is, even in the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), there is a possibility of trying to perform a right-handed game. However, as described above, in the normal state (low probability low base state), the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the second special symbol is extremely long compared to the fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the first special symbol. Because it is set to, even if the 2nd special symbol is variablely displayed in the normal state (even if the ball is entered into the 3rd starting port 26), the variable display cannot be performed many times, and the game efficiency is very high. It's a bad thing. That is, it is more advantageous for the player to display the first special symbol in a variable manner by the left-handed game than to display the second special symbol in a variable manner by the right-handed game. Here, "a state in which the first special symbol is not in the game (non-gaming state)" means that the first special symbol is not in the variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". It means that it is. In addition, "a state in which the second special symbol is not playing (non-gaming state)" means that the second special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved second special symbols is "0". It means that.

Further, in a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, the frequency with which the second starting port 21 is opened is improved, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is increased by the first special symbol time saving function. Is shortened, and the game efficiency of right-handed games is improved. In such a case, it is more advantageous to perform the right-handed game and perform the first special symbol winning / failing determination than to perform the left-handed game. Further, in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is easier to open than in the low base state, and it is easier to enter the ball into the second starting port 21 than to enter the ball into the first starting port 20. Because it is. Therefore, while passing the game ball through the gate 28, which normally triggers the determination of whether or not the symbol is correct, a right-handed hit is made to allow the game ball to enter the second starting port 21.

Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the second special symbol time saving function shortens the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the game efficiency by the right-handed game is improved. In such a case, it is possible to proceed with the game more advantageously by performing the right-handed game and performing the second special symbol winning / failing determination which is advantageous for the player. Further, in the high accuracy low base state, the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port 21 is the same as in the low accuracy low base state (normal state), and the ball is executed based on the entry into the second starting port 21. The fluctuation time of the first special symbol changes for a long time (compared to the low probability low base state). Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability fluctuation function, the fluctuation time shortening function, and the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 for the normal symbol are not activated, so that the player enters the second starting port 21. Ball frequency is low compared to high base condition. Therefore, a prize ball based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 cannot be obtained as much as in the high base state. However, instead, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment prevents the number of game balls from decreasing during the big hit due to the small hit (small hit probability: 420/630) that occurs with a high probability, and rather causes the small hit to occur frequently. It is also possible to increase the number of balls held by (generating multiple times).

That is, in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), the ball enters the second starting port 21 by frequently causing the ball to enter the second starting port 21 by the right-handed game. Aim for the next big hit by the first special symbol hit / fail judgment without greatly reducing the number of balls held. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is set to one, and even if all the right-handed game balls enter the second starting opening 21, the game is played. The sphere does not increase (maintain). Further, in this embodiment, since about 75 to 85% of the right-handed game balls are set to enter the second starting port 21, the base is high unless the ball enters another entry port. If the state is continued for a long period of time, the number of balls held will decrease, albeit slightly. Further, by adjusting the game nails around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the ball entry rate of the game ball into the second start port 21.

On the other hand, in the high-accuracy low-base state, a small hit is generated at a high frequency (420/630) by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the third starting port 26 by the right-handed game, and the accuracy is high. While aiming to increase the number of balls held in the small hit game during the low base state, the next big hit is aimed at by the second special symbol hit / fail judgment, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, in the high accuracy and low base state, the longer the period in which the next big hit does not occur (the longer the period in the high accuracy and low base state continues), the more small hits are generated. There are more opportunities (to perform small hit games), which is advantageous to the player.

[Explanation of board configuration and game status]
Further, as shown in FIG. 3, in the right game area 3B (second game area), various entrances are provided from the upstream side of the game area to the gate 28 (start gate 29), the first large winning opening 30, and the first large winning opening. The two starting openings 21 and the second winning openings 35 are arranged in the optimum order. Further, since the game ball flow passage in the right game area 3B is formed as shown in FIG. 3, when each of these winning openings is closed, about 90% of the game balls fired in the right game area 3B are , Passing through the gate 28 (start gate 29), then flowing down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 of the first large winning opening 30, then flowing down the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the second starting opening 21, and then the second winning opening 35. It is configured to flow down the upper surface of the opening / closing member 37 and flow down to the out port 34. Then, if there is an open winning opening in the middle of the flow, the ball enters the winning opening, is discharged from the winning opening to the back surface of the game board, and the entered game ball is placed in the game area downstream of the winning opening. It has a structure that is not available. Further, the remaining 10% that does not flow into the gate 28 side enters the second out port 34b provided on the upstream side of the gate 28 and is discharged to the outside of the game machine. Further, by adjusting the angle of the game nail around the second out port 34b, it is possible to adjust the inflow ratio of the game ball to the gate 28 side.

By arranging the gate 28 in the uppermost stream, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball is hindered from reaching the gate 28 by the opened second starting port 21 or the like. In addition, it is possible to prevent as much as possible that the normal symbol hold becomes "0" and a waiting time (a state in which the normal symbol does not change) occurs. That is, by arranging the gate 28 at the uppermost stream of the right game area, almost all the right-handed game balls can be passed through the gate 28 regardless of whether or not the other winning openings are opened. Further, since the game ball that has passed through the gate 28 flows down the right game area as it is, the presence of the gate 28 does not hinder the ball from entering another winning opening.

When a right-handed game is performed in a high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), it is first determined whether or not the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened. Will be done. In the high base state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time (1 second), and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also set to a high probability (239/240), so that the game ball is gated. Immediately after passing through (1 second later), the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 is opened. That is, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 and the normal symbol hit / fail determination is executed and the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the game ball that has passed through the gate reaches the entrance of the second starting port 21. 2 The starting port 21 is in the open state. In addition, since the opening time of the second starting port 21 is also set to be one time of 6.0 seconds, the second starting port 21 is closed during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second as long as the right-handed game is continued. After that, the cycle of opening once for 6.0 seconds, closing during the normal symbol fluctuation time of 1 second, and then opening once for 6.0 seconds is repeated (1 second closing → 6). Open for 0.0 seconds → Close for 1 second → Open for about 6.0 seconds → ...).

Therefore, when the right-handed game is performed in the high base state, the second starting port 21 is almost opened, and most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the second starting port 21. It will enter the ball. Further, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. In the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, in the high accuracy and high base state, there is a 1/63 probability of a big hit, no small hit, and a 62/63 probability of a loss.

First, when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, most of the game balls flowing down the right game area 3B (about 70 to 80%) are in the open state after passing through the gate 28. The ball enters the second starting port 21 and other game balls flow downstream from the game ball passage branching in front of the second starting port 21 and flow down to the third starting port 21 without flowing down to the second starting port 21. Enter the ball at 26 or flow into the out port 34. As a result, the first special symbol hit / miss determination is continuously (highly frequently) executed. In addition, since one prize ball is ejected by entering one ball into the second starting port 21, the decrease speed of the ball held is reduced, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed, and the next big hit is made. It becomes possible to aim. In addition, one prize ball is also ejected by entering one ball into the third starting port 26.

Next, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit, the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened in a mode corresponding to the big hit type shown in FIG. .. Further, the second big winning opening 35 provided on the downstream side of the second starting opening 21 is not opened in the big hit game. As a result, when the big hit game is started, the game ball that flows down by the game to the right is smoothly entered into the first big winning opening without being hindered by other winning openings such as the second starting opening 21. Enter the ball at 30. Here, when the second starting port 21 is arranged upstream from the first big winning opening 30, the second starting port 21 shifts to the low base state during the big hit game, but in this embodiment, the second starting port 21 is in the low base state. Since the specifications are such that the ball can be opened, the game ball that flows down the right game area during the big hit game enters the second start port 21 first and does not enter the second start port 21. A situation occurs in which only the ball enters the second prize opening 30.

Moreover, since the number of prize balls based on the entry into the second starting port 21 is one, the execution time of the jackpot game is only extended for a long time, and the player has no merit. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be redundant, will not proceed smoothly, and the game will be less enjoyable. Therefore, as in this embodiment, by arranging the first big winning opening 30 on the upstream side of the second starting opening 21, such a situation can be prevented and the big hit game can proceed smoothly. Become. Since the first big winning opening 30 is not opened except during the big hit game, the first big winning opening 30 may prevent the ball from entering the second starting port 21 when not during the big hit game. Absent.

Next, the high accuracy and low base state will be described. The high-accuracy low-base state is a low-base state, but since the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is short, it is advantageous for the player to proceed with the game by hitting right. When a right-handed game is performed in a high-accuracy and low-base state, a determination as to whether or not the game ball first passes through the gate 28 and the second starting port 21 is opened (normal symbol hit / fail determination) is executed. In the low base state (high accuracy low base state), the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a longer time (3 seconds) than in the high base state, and the probability of hitting the normal symbol is also lower than that in the high base state. Since it is set to (1/240), a little time after the game ball passes through the gate (3 seconds later), if it hits, the movable member 23 operates and the second starting port 21 opens. It becomes a state. Since the probability of hitting is set to 1/240, it is almost possible that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state. In addition, instead of such an aspect, the probability of winning in the normal symbol hit / fail judgment in the low base state may be set to 0/240, and all the results may be out of order. In this way, the second starting port 21 will not be opened in the low base state. Similarly, the hit probability in the high base state is 239/240.

That is, in the high accuracy and low base state, the probability that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state is set to be very low, so that the game ball that has flowed down to the entrance of the second starting port 21 is set to the second starting port 21. The possibility of entering the ball is low, and the possibility of reaching the entrance of the second large winning opening 35 through the upper surface of the movable member 23 is set high. The possibility that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a small hit varies regardless of whether it is in the high base state (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) or in the high accuracy low base state. Absent. That is, the small hit probability does not change regardless of the gaming state (small hit probability: 420/630). Further, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, and only the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit.

The game ball that flows down the downstream of the first winning opening 30 through the upper surface of the opening / closing member 32 is branched into a third starting port 26 side passage and a second starting port 21 side passage by a branching portion. When the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the third starting port 26 enters the third starting port 26, the second special symbol hit / miss determination is executed. Further, in the high accuracy and low base state, it is unlikely that the second starting port 21 will be in the open state even if the game ball passes through the gate 28, so that the game ball flowing into the passage on the second starting port 21 side is almost the same. All of them flow down to the second big winning opening 35 and the third out opening 34c provided downstream of the second starting opening 21 without entering the second starting opening 21.

Further, when the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination executed based on entering the third starting port 26 is a small hit, the second big winning opening 35 on the downstream side of the second starting port 21 is opened. , It is opened in the opening / closing mode for small hits shown in FIG. Specifically, the opening operation of 0.3 seconds is executed 6 times (the closing time between the opening operations is 0.1 seconds, and the total opening time is 1.8 seconds). Then, the game ball that has flowed into the passage on the side of the second starting port 21 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 23 of the closed second starting port 21 and flows down to the second big winning opening 35, and is opened by the small hit game. Enter the second big winning opening 35 which is.

Since the prize balls based on the entry into the second large winning opening 35 are 10 prize balls for each entry, the balls are entered into the second large winning opening 35 during the small hit game. This makes it possible to increase the number of balls held during the high accuracy and low base state. Further, since the high-accuracy low-base state continues at least until the next big hit occurs due to the special symbol hit / fail judgment, the player can increase the number of balls held as the high-accuracy low-base state continues for a long period of time. It will be possible. In the high accuracy and high base state, the second special symbol time is shortened and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to a long time (the first special symbol long time state). The execution frequency of is higher than the execution frequency of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain about 20 prize balls (two balls) on average by generating one small hit game. By generating this small hit game a plurality of times (many times) until the next big hit occurs, it is possible to increase a large number of game balls (for example, 200 balls in 10 times). In addition, as a result, as the total winning balls for the "renso period" in which the right-handed game is continued, the winning balls for the small hit game can be added in addition to the winning balls for the big hit game, and a larger number of game balls can be obtained. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, the gate 28, the first big winning opening 30 for big hits (for big hits only), and the second big winning opening 35 arranged downstream from the second starting opening 21 (the most downstream of them) are for small hits (for small hits). It is said to be a big prize opening (only for small hits). Further, by arranging the second big winning opening 35, which is a big winning opening for small hits, downstream from the second starting opening 21, the opening operation (opening / closing control) of the second starting opening 21 causes the second big winning opening. The number (ratio) of game balls reaching the winning opening 35 can be controlled. Specifically, when the small hit game is executed by the opening / closing control of the second starting port 21 (time for opening state, fluctuation time of normal symbol, winning probability of hit / fail judgment of normal symbol), a high base state ( The high-probability low-base state is more likely than the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state) to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 35. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, by forming a flow path that does not reach the second big winning opening 35 unless it passes through the second starting opening 21 (without entering the ball), the first 2 The effect of opening / closing control of the starting port 21 is made more effective.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the low accuracy and high base state where the small hit game can occur, the second starting port 21 is configured so as to be hardly opened (may be configured not to be opened at all). It is difficult to adjust the ball entry rate to the second large winning opening 35 when the game occurs by entering the ball into the second starting opening 21. Therefore, a third out port 34c is provided between the second starting port 21 and the second big winning opening 35, and the ball entry rate to the third out opening 34c can be adjusted to make the second big winning. The ball entry rate to the mouth 35 can be adjusted.

Further, even in the same right-handed game, the game ball is inserted into the second starting port 21 to almost maintain the holding ball (including a slight increase or a slight decrease) (or the speed of the holding ball decrease is suppressed). (While), a state in which the game is played with the expectation that the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit), and a small game ball is inserted into the third starting port 26. A state in which the player plays with the expectation that the result of the second special symbol winning / failing judgment will be a big hit (advantageous big hit) while increasing the number of balls held by entering the second big winning opening 35 when a hit occurs (high accuracy and low). (Base state), and has diversified playability. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game. For the player, the high-accuracy low-base state in which the number of balls held can be increased is more advantageous than the high-base state. In addition, while continuing the right-handed game, it is possible to shift between a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) and a high accuracy low base state. Diversify and enhance the interest of games.

Further, the start gate 29 is provided at the uppermost stream in the right game area 3B by also being used as the gate 28. As a result, when the jackpot standby state is reached, the game ball is passed through the start gate 29 at an arbitrary timing without being hindered by the second starting port 21 or the like, and the jackpot game is started. It becomes possible to do. The start gate 29 and the gate 28 may be provided separately. In that case, the start gate 29 may be upstream or downstream of the gate 28, but the first large winning opening 30 and the first gate 28 may be provided. It is necessary to provide the 2 starting port 21, the 3rd starting port 26, and the 2nd big winning opening 35 upstream.

Further, when the right-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit and controlled in a predetermined manner to notify that the right-handed game should be fired. Further, when the left-handed game is to be performed, the firing direction indicator 47 is lit (display controlled) in a predetermined manner to notify that the left-handed game should be fired. Specifically, the launch direction indicator 47 is composed of two LEDs of "yz", and indicates the launch direction by turning on the LEDs according to the game state. For example, in the low base state, it is possible to notify that the left game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned off, such as "y □ z □" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can. In addition, in the high base state, it is possible to notify that the right game area should be fired as a display mode in which both LEDs are turned on, such as "y ■ z ■" (for example, □: off, ■: on). it can.

Here, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gaming states when the variation display of the identification information (special symbol, effect symbol) is performed are "low accuracy low base state", "high accuracy low base state", and "high accuracy low base state". It is possible to control either "low accuracy high base state" or "high accuracy high base state", but among them, the low accuracy low base state is also called "normal gaming state", and the high accuracy low base state is called. Also called "specific game state".

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit) of the game control microcomputer 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 46. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. .. As shown in FIG. 10, in the main control main process, the initial setting is first performed (S101). In the initial settings, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) settings, and various flags, statuses, and counters. Reset etc. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Also, the initial setting (S101) is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that. In the examples and drawings, the normal symbol is "general symbol", the special symbol is "special symbol", the first special symbol is "special symbol 1" or "first special symbol", and the second special symbol is "special symbol". It may be called "2" or "second special drawing".

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are disabled (S102), and normal symbol / special symbol main random number update processing (S103) is executed. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by one. When the value of each random number counter reaches the upper limit, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, interrupts are enabled (S104). While interrupts are enabled, interrupt processing (S105) can be executed. This interrupt processing (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the interrupt process (S105) and the start of the next interrupt process (S105), the update process of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeated. Will be executed. If an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU in the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt processing (S105) is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled (S104).

[Interrupt processing]
Next, interrupt processing (S105) will be described with reference to FIG. In the interrupt processing (S105), the output processing (S201) is first executed. In the output process (S201), commands (control signals) set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 are output to the sub control board 90, the payout control board 110, and the like in each process described below. To do. Examples of the command and the like output here include information on the game state, the result of the special symbol winning / failing determination, the symbol as the jackpot type, the fluctuation pattern, and the like. The command consists of, for example, 2 bytes of information. The upper 1 byte is information about the type of command, and the lower 1 byte is information about the content of the command.

In the input process (S202) performed after the output process (S201), various sensors (first start port sensor 20a, second start port sensor 21a, third start port sensor 26a) mainly attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are used. , The first large winning opening sensor 30a, the second large winning opening sensor 35a, the general entry opening sensor 27a, etc. (see FIG. 5)) reads the detection signal and stores it in the output buffer of the RAM as the winning ball information. Further, the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball tray 62 (also referred to as “lower plate”) is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM 84 as the lower plate full data.

Next, the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is executed. The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203) is the same process as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed in the main control main process of FIG. That is, the update processing of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in FIG. 7 is performed after the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (S105) and the other periods (after the end of the interrupt processing (S105)). It is performed both in the period until the next interrupt processing (S105) is started). As a result, the acquired values of various random numbers are given randomness.

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start port sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal symbol operation process (S206), and special figure 1 operation process (S207), which will be described later. ), Special Figure 2 operation process (S208), hold ball number process (S209), and power failure monitoring process (S210). After that, various other processes (S211) are executed to end the interrupt process (S105). Then, until the interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80 (main control unit), the main control main processes S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10), and the interrupt pulse is input. Then (after about 4 msec), interrupt processing (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the command or the like set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) is output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
Next, the start port sensor detection process (S204) will be described with reference to FIG. In the start port sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), then the number of normal symbol hold balls (the number of normal symbol hold, specifically, the number of normal symbol hold provided in the RAM) is counted by the counter. It is determined whether or not the value) is 4 or more (S302). On the other hand, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 in S301 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305.

If it is determined in S302 that the number of normally symbol reserved balls is 4 or more (YES in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of normal symbol reserved balls is not 4 or more (NO in S302), "1" is added to the stored normal symbol reserved balls (S303), and the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304) is performed. Do and proceed to S305. In the normal symbol random number acquisition process (S304), the value (label-TRND-H, FIG. 7 (B)) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is acquired. Then, the acquired random number values (acquisition information, normal figure acquisition information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of normal symbol hold balls in the normal figure hold storage unit provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, whether or not the game ball has entered the first start port 20 or the second start port 21, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a or the second start port sensor 21a. Judgment (S305). If it is determined in S305 that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. On the other hand, when it is determined in S305 that a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (YES in S305), the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (the number of first special figure reserved, specifically (S306), it is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of first special figure reservations) provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number). Then, when it is determined in S306 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has reached four (YES in S306), the process proceeds to S309. When it is determined in S306 that the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is less than 4 (NO in S306), 1 is added to the stored number of special figure 1 reserved balls (S307), and a random number related to special figure 1 is acquired. Process (S308) and proceed to S309.

In the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not, and the random number for determining the jackpot type, which are stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM. The counter value (label-TRND-AS) and the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (random number values shown in FIG. 7 (A)), and the acquired random number values (acquisition information, special feature) are acquired. The figure acquisition information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in the first special figure hold storage unit 85a.

In S309, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the third start port 26, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the third start port sensor 26a (S309). When it is determined in S309 that the game ball has not entered the third starting port 26 (NO in S309), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S309 that a game ball has entered the third starting port 26 (YES in S309), then the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, specifically, the main control). It is determined whether or not the number (the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of the second special figure hold) provided in the RAM of the unit 80 has reached four (upper limit number) (S310). Then, when it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has reached four (YES in S310), the process ends. When it is determined in S310 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is less than 4 (NO in S310), "1" is added to the stored number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 (S311). Random number acquisition processing is performed (S312), and the processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S312), the value of the special symbol hit / miss determination counter stored in the update value storage area (not shown) of the RAM is the same as in the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S308). (Label-TRND-A), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-AS), and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-T1) are acquired (shown in FIG. 7A). Random number value), and those acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in the second special figure reserved storage unit 85b.

[Processing at the time of starting ball]
Next, the process at the time of starting and entering the ball (S205) will be described with reference to FIG. The game control microcomputer 81 performs the start ball entry process (S205) after the start port sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (S315). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 in S307 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port. On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired in the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) in the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special figure hold storage unit is read (acquired information). S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special symbol is determined (S317). In S317, among the acquired random number values read out, the value of the random number counter for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not (the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not) is a big hit according to the current game state (low probability state or high probability state). It is determined whether or not it is out of order (preliminary determination), and if the result of the determination is a big hit, the type of the big hit is further determined (preliminary determination). The determination (pre-judgment) by S317 is a pre-judgment (so-called "hold look-ahead") in which the hit / fail judgment (judgment of whether or not it is a big hit) for the special figure 2 hold is performed prior to the hit / fail judgment in the special figure 2 hit / fail judgment process described later. ") Corresponds to.

The pre-judgment of whether or not it is a big hit can be made in the big hit judgment table (see FIG. 8A), that is, in the high probability state, the big hit judgment table for the high probability state, or in the normal state (low probability state). For example, it is possible to determine whether or not the value matches the jackpot determination value based on the jackpot determination table for the normal state. Further, as another pre-judgment mode, as a fluctuation pattern information judgment table capable of judging fluctuation pattern information, a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a normal state (for a low probability state) and a fluctuation pattern information judgment table for a high probability state (for a high probability state) It is assumed that the fluctuation pattern information determination table of the above is provided. Then, in the preliminary determination, predetermined variation pattern information is selected based on the acquired random number value (value of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct) and the variation pattern information determination table according to the game state. It is possible to do. Then, from the selected fluctuation pattern information, it is possible to identify whether or not the game is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and whether or not a game effect with high reliability of the big hit is executed.

Next, in S318, game information (preliminary judgment information) related to the result of judgment by S317, specifically, information indicating whether or not the random value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the jackpot judgment value (big hit information), Information indicating the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (random value for determining the jackpot type) (big hit type information), information indicating whether or not the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not matches the small hit determination value (small hit information) ), Command data including information indicating the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) is generated as a special figure 2 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). In addition, as a special figure 2 start ball entry command, a part or all of the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number read by S316 may be transmitted to the sub-control board as it is, or the value of the special figure 2 acquisition random number may be transmitted as it is. Is not transmitted as it is, but game information acquired based on the value of the random number acquired in Special Figure 2 (for example, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern information) may be transmitted.

Further, by analyzing the special figure 2 start-in ball command transmitted from the main control unit 80 by the sub-control unit 90, it is possible to determine whether the information is related to a big hit, what type of big hit is, and information related to a small hit. The sub-control unit 90 can identify whether or not there is. Further, in this embodiment, in addition to this, by analyzing the special figure 2 start entry command, whether or not the acquired special figure 2 acquisition random number becomes a big hit when it is determined in a high probability state, and low. It is possible to specify whether or not it will be a big hit when it is judged in the probability state. As a result, the sub-control unit 90 stores the received special figure 2 start entry command as hold (effect hold information), predetermines the effect hold information at a specific timing, and determines whether or not the command is successful in a low probability state. It is possible to determine whether or not the effect hold information determined to be a big hit is stored in.

From the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is correct or not among the random number values read by S316 is not transmitted to the sub-control unit as it is, and the value of the random number counter for determining the other jackpot type (big hit). Command data including information indicating the value of the random number value for determining the type) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (variation pattern random number value) and the information indicating the result of the pre-judgment are generated as the special figure 2 start entry command. It is possible to set.

Next, in S319, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" in the same manner as in the above-described processing according to Special Figure 2 (S319). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S321. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 in S311 in the start port sensor detection process (S204) based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first start port. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is. The processing of S321 to S323 is the same processing as that of S316 to S318 described above for the special figure 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquisition information) acquired by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special figure hold storage unit is read (S321). Pre-determination is performed on the read acquired random number value (S322). Then, command data including the game information related to this pre-determination is generated as a special figure 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The preliminary determination (holding look-ahead) of S322 is performed prior to the accuracy determination in the special figure 1 accuracy determination process described later.

[Public map operation processing]
The game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal drawing operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14 after the start ball entry process (S205). In the normal figure operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and "normal figure operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these stages. .. Then, when the "normal figure operation status" is "1" (YES in S401), the normal symbol standby process (S402) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "2" (S401). NO, YES for S403), processing during normal symbol fluctuation (S404), and if the "normal symbol operation status" is "3" (NO for both S401 and S403, YES for S405), the normal symbol is confirmed. The process (S406) is performed, and when the "normal figure operation status" is "4" (all of S401, S403, and S405 are NO), the normal electric accessory process (S407) is performed. The normal operation status is "1" by default.

[Normal symbol standby processing]
Next, the normal symbol standby process (S402) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol standby process (S402), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and when it is determined that the number of reserved balls is "0" in S501 (YES in S501), the process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in S501 that it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit / fail determination process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol variation pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process, referring to the normal symbol variation pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is the high base state (state B), the normal symbol variation time is 1 second. Select a symbol variation pattern. On the other hand, if the gaming state is a low base state (states A and C), a normal symbol variation pattern with a normal symbol variation time of 3 seconds is selected. Further, after the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S503), the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) described later is performed, then the normal symbol variation start process (S505) is performed, and the process is completed. In the normal symbol fluctuation start processing (S505), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started with the normal symbol fluctuation pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". Further, in the normal symbol change start process, a normal symbol change start command is set in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of change of the normal symbol.

[Normal symbol hit / fail judgment process]
Next, the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol hit / miss determination process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit / miss determination random number counter stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit is read out (S601). Next, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not the gaming state is a high base state (low accuracy high base state or high accuracy high base state) (S602). When it is determined in S602 that the state B flag is ON, that is, it is in a high base state (YES in S602), the table for state B (hit determination) among the normal symbol hit determination tables shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the high-probability normal-figure hit / fail judgment based on the values (0) to “238”), it is determined whether the value is a hit (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is determined whether or not the value (label-TRND-H) of the read random number counter for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct matches any of the hit determination values.

On the other hand, in S602, when the state B flag is not ON, that is, when it is determined that the base state is low (NO in S602), the state A (state C) in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C). Based on the table (hit judgment value is "0" to "119"), it is determined whether or not the hit is a hit (S603), and the process proceeds to S605. Then, in S605, it is determined whether or not the result of the normal figure hit / fail judgment (S603, S604) is a hit (normal figure hit) (S605), and if it is judged to be wrong (NO in S605), the stop display is lost. Determine the normal symbol (the symbol that is out of the ordinary) (S606), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined to be a hit (per normal figure) in S605 (YES in S605), the normal symbol per stop display (design per normal figure) is determined (S607), and the normal figure hit flag is turned ON (S608). ), Finish the process.

[Ordinary symbol random number shift processing]
Next, the ordinary symbol random number shift process (S504) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each Fuzu hold in the Fuzu hold storage unit is shifted by one to the side read from the current position (S702). Then, the address space, which is the storage location of the highest hold storage in the normal figure hold storage unit, is emptied (“0”), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth hold of the normal figure is cleared to 0 (S703). ), Finish the process. In this way, the general map hold is digested in the order of hold.

[Processing during normal symbol change]
Next, the process during normal symbol variation (S404) will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal symbol fluctuation processing (S404), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed (S801), and when it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation time has not elapsed (NO in S801), the processing is performed. Finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the passage has passed (YES in S801), the normal symbol fluctuation stop command is set (S802), the normal symbol operation status is set to "3" (S803), and then the normal symbol fluctuation display is displayed. Other processing such as stopping at the display result (hit normal symbol or out-of-order normal symbol) according to the judgment result of the random number for determining whether the normal symbol is correct or not is performed (S804), and the process is completed.

[Normal symbol confirmation process]
Next, the ordinary symbol determination process (S406) will be described with reference to FIG. In the normal symbol determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit flag is ON (S901). When it is determined that the normal figure hit flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal figure operation status is set to "1" (S905), and the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S901), then it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON, that is, whether or not it is in the high base state (S902). When it is determined in S902 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S902), the opening pattern for state B (for high base state) is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21). (S903), shift to S904. The opening pattern for the state B (for the high base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 1.8 seconds is repeated three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter that counts the number of times the second start port 21 is opened.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S902), the open patterns for the variable winning device 22 (second starting port 21) are open for states A and C (for low base states). Set the pattern (S906) and move to S904. The opening pattern for the state A and the state C (for the low base state) is an opening pattern in which the opening for 0.9 seconds is performed three times as described above. Therefore, "3" is set in the second start port opening counter. In S904, the normal figure operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is completed.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
Next, the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407) will be described with reference to FIG. In the ordinary electric accessory processing (S407), first, it is determined whether or not the end flag per normal figure is ON (S1001). The normal-figure hit end flag is a flag indicating that the opening of the second start port 21 has been completed in the auxiliary game executed as a hit. When it is determined that the end flag per normal figure is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether or not the second starting port 21 is open (S1002). When it is determined in S1002 that the second starting port is not open (NO in S1002), then it is determined whether or not it is time to open the second starting port 21 (S1003), and the opening time has not been reached. If it is determined (NO in S1003), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1003 that it is time to open the second starting port (YES in S1003), the control for opening the second starting port is executed (S1004), and the process ends. If S1002 determines that the second starting port 21 is being opened (YES in S1002), it is time to close the second starting port 21 (that is, after opening the second starting port 21 in advance. If it is determined (whether or not the specified opening time has passed) (S1005) and it is determined that it is not the closing time of the second starting port (NO in S1005), the process is terminated. When the S1005 determines that it is the closing time of the second starting port (YES in S1005), the process of closing (closing) the second starting port 21 is performed (S1006), and the value of the second starting port opening counter is set. Is decremented by 1 (S1007), and the process proceeds to S1008.

In S1008, it is determined whether or not the value of the second start port opening counter is "0" (S1008). When it is determined in S1008 that the value of the opening counter is not "0" (NO in S1008), the process is terminated as it is in order to open the second starting port 21 again. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1008 that the value of the open counter is "0" (YES in S1008), the end processing for each normal figure to end the auxiliary game is performed (S1009), and the end flag for normal figure is set ( S1010), finish the process. The second start port opening counter becomes "0" when the second start port 21 is opened three times (opening operation of the movable member 23) in the state B (high base state), and the state A. And even in the state C (low base state), it becomes "0" when the second starting port 21 is opened three times. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1001 that the end flag per normal figure is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 for the number of times set in S903 or S906 has been completed. , Turn off the normal figure hit end flag (S1011), turn off the normal figure hit flag (S1012), set the normal figure operation status to "1" (S1013), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol standby process (S402) is executed again as the normal symbol operation process (FIG. 14).

[Special Figure 1 Operation Processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 operation process (S207) after the normal figure operation process (S206). This special figure 1 operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 29. In the special figure 1 operation process (S207), as shown in FIG. 21, the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (first large prize device 31 and second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. "Special figure 1 operation status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1101, YES for S1103), special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) is performed, and if "Special Figure 1 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1101 and S1103, YES for S1105) ), When the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) is performed and the "special symbol 1 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1101, S1103, S1105, YES for S1107), special electric as a big hit game The accessory process 1 (S1108) is performed, and when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5" (all of S1101, S1103, S1105, and S1107 are NO), the process is completed. The operation status of Special Figure 1 is "1" by default. Further, since the small hit is not set as the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, the special electric accessory process 2 is not executed in the special figure 1 operation process, but the small hit is set as the result of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment. You may. In this case, when the "special figure 1 operation status" is "5", the special electric accessory process 2 as a small hit game is executed.

[Special symbol 1 standby processing]
Next, the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the first starting port 20 (that is, the number of reserved balls in special figure 1) is "0" (S1201). When it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0", that is, the random number counter value acquired based on the entry into the first starting port 20 is not stored (YES in S1201), then , It is determined whether or not Special Figure 2 is in the game (S1207). Then, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is in the game (YES in S1207), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1207 that the special figure 2 is not in the game (NO in S1207), the process of setting the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the standby screen (during the execution of the demo screen for waiting for customers). If it is determined whether or not (S1208) and it is determined that the standby screen is in progress (YES in S1208), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1208 that the standby screen is not in progress (NO in S1208), the standby screen setting process for displaying the standby screen is executed (S1209), and the process ends.

Further, in S1201, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not "0", that is, there is one or more memory of the random number counter value acquired based on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20 (in S1201). NO), special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203), special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1204), special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), and special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) are performed in this order. Here, "special figure 2 (second special symbol) is not in the game" means that special figure 2 is not in variable display (including the fixed stop display time) and the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0". Means that. Of course, it means that the big hit game and the small hit game according to the special figure 2 are not executed either.

[Special Figure 1 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 hit / miss determination process (S1203), first, as a determination value, the determination value is stored in the lowest region of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special figure reservation). The value (label-TRND-A) of the random number counter for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct (in the oldest memory) is read (S1601). Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON, that is, whether or not the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (S1602). When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1602), the process proceeds to S1607.

That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, when one special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the hit / fail judgment of the other special symbol does not determine whether it is a big hit, but a small hit or a small hit. It is considered to be one of the misses (that is, it is not judged as a big hit). Since there is no small hit as a result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment, when the second special symbol is executing the variation display related to the big hit, the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment executed during that period is All will be off. When it is determined in S1602 that the special figure 2 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON, that is, the second special symbol is not executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (NO in S1602), then whether or not the probability variation flag is ON, that is, Determine if it is in a high probability state (S1603). When it is determined in S1603 that the probability variation flag is not ON, that is, it is in a low probability state (NO in S1603), the jackpot determination for the normal state (for the low probability state) in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8A) The hit / fail judgment is made based on the table (big hit judgment values are "3" and "397") (S1604). On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S1603), the hit / fail determination is performed based on the jackpot determination table for the high probability state in the jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) (S1605). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3", "5", "7", "311", "313", "317", "337", "397", "449". , "503".

In S1606, it is determined whether or not the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is "big hit" (S1606), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (YES in S1606), the value of the random number counter for determining the jackpot type (label-TRND-). AS) is read out, the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B) (S1608), and the jackpot symbol is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (S1609). Fig. 1 Turn on the jackpot fluctuation flag (S1610) and finish the process. In the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the first special symbol, the jackpot type is judged using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol, it is for the second special symbol. The jackpot type is determined using the jackpot type determination table of. Further, when it is determined as a big hit by the hit / fail judgment of the first special symbol (special figure 1), any one of 15R first big hit, 4R second big hit, 4R third big hit, and 4R fourth big hit is executed. .. If the hit / fail judgment of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is determined to be a big hit, either the 15R 5th big hit, the 2R 6th big hit, or the 2R 7th big hit is executed (Fig. 8 (B)). On the other hand, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot determination (S1604, S1605) is not "big hit" (NO in S1606), the process proceeds to S1607. In S1607, the off-design is determined (S1607), and the processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot fluctuation flag, the first jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the first special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed) is being executed. And a second jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the jackpot (variation display in which the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed), and the main control unit 80 The flag corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the above is set. Further, as the small hit fluctuation flag, a second small hit fluctuation flag indicating that the second special symbol is executing the fluctuation display related to the small hit (variation display in which the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is displayed. A flag corresponding to the small hit variation flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set. Then, when the jackpot fluctuation flag is set for one special symbol (that is, when the fluctuation display related to the jackpot is being displayed), in the other special symbol hit / fail determination, a process of determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed. Not performed. That is, control is not performed so that both special symbols execute the variable display related to the jackpot in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which an excessively large amount of game profit is given to the player in a very short time, and to appropriately suppress gambling.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern selection process]
In the special symbol 1 standby process (FIG. 22), the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process is performed (S1204) after the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203). As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, in the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204), first, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the state A (whether or not it is the low probability low base state) (S1701). Then, when it is determined in S1701 that the state is A (YES in S1701), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1702), and the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON. When it is determined (YES in S1702), the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) is referred to in the state A jackpot table (the portion corresponding to the status A and the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Select a variation pattern based on (S1703). If the fluctuation pattern is decided, the fluctuation time is also decided. Further, in the first embodiment, any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 having different lengths of fluctuation time is selected depending on the state A jackpot table.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S1702), then it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls (number of reserved balls) is either 1 or 2 (S1705). When it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is either 1 or 2 (YES in S1705), the state A first hold number out table (state A and out of the variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 and the number of holds The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the parts corresponding to 1 and 2). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1705 that the number of holds is neither 1 nor 2, that is, the number of holds is either 3 or 4 (NO in S1705), the state A second hold number removal table (FIG. The variation pattern is selected based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the variation pattern table shown in 9 (the portion corresponding to the state A and the number of pending numbers 3 and 4). As a result, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "3" or "4", the fluctuation time is shorter than when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is "1" or "2". Fluctuation patterns are more likely to be selected. In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P8 to P11 are selected. As a result, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works, and the average fluctuation time is shortened.

If it is determined in S1701 that the gaming state is not state A (low accuracy low base state) (NO in S1701), then whether the gaming state is state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state). Is determined (S1708). When it is determined in S1708 that the state is B (S1708), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1709), and when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1708). (YES in S1709), refer to the state B jackpot table (the part corresponding to state B and jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9), and fluctuate based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1). Select a pattern (S1710). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P15 to P16 are selected. When it is determined in S1709 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1709), refer to the state B deviation table (the part corresponding to the state B and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1711). In the first embodiment, fluctuation patterns P17 to P19 are selected.

Further, when it is determined in S1708 that the gaming state is not state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state), that is, the gaming state is state C (high accuracy low base state) (NO in S1708). Then, when it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S1712) and it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S1712), the state C jackpot table (in FIG. 9). The fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the state C and the portion corresponding to the jackpot in the fluctuation pattern table shown (S1710). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P23 is selected. When it is determined in S1712 that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is OFF (NO in S1712), refer to the state C deviation table (the part corresponding to the state C and deviation in the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 9). Then, the fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) (S1714). In the first embodiment, the variation pattern P24 is selected.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the other processing shown in FIG. 24 is executed (S1704), and the processing is completed. In the other processing (S1704), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 1 Random number shift processing]
Next, the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205) will be described with reference to FIG. In the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is decremented by 1 (S1801). Next, when the storage location of various counter values in the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is one lower side (for example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a is composed of the address space corresponding to the addresses "0000" to "0003". , Address "0000" side) (S1802). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the first special figure reservation storage unit 85a, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1803) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 1 random number shift process (S1205), the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (S1206) of FIG. 22 is executed. In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (S1206), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "2", the fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started.

[Special symbol 1 processing during change]
Next, the special symbol 1 variable processing (S1104) will be described with reference to FIG. 27. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104), first, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 (the fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in S1204 of FIG. 22, see FIG. 9) has elapsed. Whether or not it is determined (S1901). When it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 has not elapsed (NO in S1901), the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing is performed (S1914), and the processing is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in S1901 that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 has elapsed (YES in S1901), the process shifts to S1903. In S1903, the special figure 1 fluctuation stop command is set (S1903), and the process shifts to the processing of S1904.

Next, in S1904, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S1905). When it is determined in S1904 that the state B flag is ON (YES in S1904), the value of the state B counter (state B fluctuation counter) that counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the state B (high base state). Is subtracted by 1 (S1905), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the state B counter is "0" (S1906). When it is determined in S1906 that the value of the state B counter is "0" (YES in S1906), the state B flag is turned off (S1907), and the process proceeds to S1908. By turning off the state B flag, the gaming state shifts from the high base state to the low base state. Specifically, if it is a low accuracy high base state, it shifts to a low accuracy low base state (normal state). In the high accuracy and high base state, "10000" is set in the state B counter, so that the value of the state B counter is substantially "0" even if the counter is subtracted for each fluctuation. Absent. That is, the high accuracy and high base state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

In S1908, the special figure 1 operation status is set to "3" (S1908), and the variation display of the special symbol is stopped at the result according to the judgment result of the special symbol hit / miss judgment random number and the big hit type determination random number. (S1909) and finish the process.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing]
As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) is performing the fluctuation display when the big hit game or the small hit game according to the special figure 2 is executed during the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. This is a process of temporarily suspending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the special symbol 1 of the above and restarting the interrupted measurement when the big hit game or the small hit game is completed. As a result, during the execution of the big hit game or the small hit game related to one special symbol, the hit / fail determination process or the variation display related to the other special symbol is not executed.

A special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) will be described with reference to FIG. 28. In the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption processing (S1902), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON (S2901), when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is not ON (NO in S2901), and then the special figure 1 FIG. 2 It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON, that is, whether or not the jackpot game according to Special FIG. 2 is being executed (S2902). When it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2902), then whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is being executed. It is determined whether or not it is (S2909). When it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON, that is, neither the big hit game nor the small hit game related to the special figure 2 is executed (NO in S2909), the process ends. Then, the variable display of the special figure 1 is continued. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2902 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is ON (YES in S2902), and when it is determined in S2909 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2909), special figure 1 The interruption flag is turned ON (S2903), the measurement of the variation time in Special Figure 1 is interrupted (S2904), and the processing is completed. As a result, the variable display of the special figure 1 can be temporarily interrupted.

Further, in S2901, when it is determined that the special figure 1 interruption flag is ON, that is, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is already interrupted (YES in S2901), whether or not the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON. Is determined (S2905). When it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2905), it is determined that the jackpot game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2905 that the special figure 2 big hit flag is not ON (NO in S2905), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (S2906). When it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON (YES in S2906), it is determined that the small hit game related to special figure 2 is still being executed, and the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2906 that the special figure 2 small hit flag is not ON (NO in S2906), it is determined that the big hit game or small hit game related to special figure 2 has ended, and the special figure 1 interruption flag is turned off. (S2907), special figure 1 The measurement of the fluctuation time is restarted (S2908), and the processing is completed. As a result, the suspended display of the fluctuation of the first special symbol (time measurement of the fluctuation time) can be resumed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the interruption flag, the special figure 1 interruption flag (also referred to as “first interruption flag”) indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being interrupted, and the second special symbol A special figure 2 interruption flag (also referred to as “second interruption flag”) indicating that the fluctuation display is being interrupted, and a flag corresponding to the interruption flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80. Is set (memorized).

[Special symbol 1 confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106) will be described with reference to FIG. 29. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special symbol 1 determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (S2001). When it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag is ON (YES in S2001), the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation flag indicating that the jackpot fluctuation display related to the first special symbol is being displayed is turned off (S2002), and the first The special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating the execution of the jackpot game related to the special symbol is turned ON (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2004. As a result, in Special Figure 1, it can be shown that the variable display related to the big hit is finished (the big hit is confirmed) and the game shifts to the big hit game.

In S2004, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is a 15R jackpot (S2004), and if it is determined that the jackpot is a 15R jackpot (YES in S2004), the round to be executed during the jackpot game (in the mode of opening once per round) Set "15" to the value of the round counter that counts the number of times (from opening to closing of the big winning opening in one round) (S2005), and set the big hit opening command to start the big hit game (S2006). ), Set the operation status of Special Figure 1 to "4" (S2007), and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2004 that it is not a 15R jackpot (NO in S2004), the jackpot type is a 4R jackpot, so set "4" to the value of the round counter (S2008) and move to S2006. In addition, a stop command is transmitted to the sub-control board 90 at the stop timing of the special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner. By receiving this stop command, the sub-control board 90 can grasp that the variation display of the special symbol has ended. As a result, the jackpot standby state is set. Further, when it is determined in S2001 that the special figure 1 big hit fluctuation flag is not ON (NO in S2001), neither the big hit game nor the small hit game is started, that is, the fluctuation display is related to the deviation, so the special figure 1 operation status Is set to "1" (S2009), and the process is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, as the jackpot flag, the special figure 1 jackpot flag indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the first special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed (“1st jackpot”). (Also referred to as "flag") and the special figure 2 jackpot flag (also referred to as "second jackpot flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail judgment related to the second special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot game related to the jackpot is being executed. When the jackpot game is executed, the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored). In addition, as a small hit flag, a special figure 2 small hit flag (also referred to as a "small hit flag") indicating that the result of the hit / fail determination related to the second special symbol is a small hit and the small hit game related to the small hit is being executed. When the small hit game is executed, the small hit flag corresponding to the small hit flag storage means provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 is set (stored).

Here, the round display 45 is composed of three LEDs, a 2R lamp, a 4R lamp, and a 15R lamp, and the corresponding lamp is lit and displayed at the timing when the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, when the 4R second big hit is achieved, the display mode is such as "2R Δ4R ▲ 15R Δ" (for example, ▲: on, Δ: off). Next, the special figure 2 operation process (S211) and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 39. In the special figure 2 operation process (S211), the special figure 1 operation process shown in FIGS. 21 to 29 (S211) Since the processing is performed in the same flow as S206) etc., the description will be simplified below.

[Special figure 2 operation processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, the special figure 2 operation process (S208) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 operation process (S207) shown in FIG. 21. As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 operation process (S208) after the special figure 1 operation process (S207). In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol can execute variable display in parallel by the special figure 1 operation process and the special figure 2 operation process. That is, the digestion of the 1st special symbol hold and the digestion of the 2nd special symbol hold ("Variation display of the 1st special symbol and the variation display of the 2nd special symbol", "1st special symbol hit / miss judgment and 2nd special symbol" It is said that the hit / fail judgment and ") can be executed in parallel. Further, in the first embodiment, the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the second starting port (the second special symbol hit / miss judgment) is the hit / fail judgment based on the ball entering the first starting port (the first special symbol hit / miss). It is more likely to be a jackpot with a large profit (a large amount of profit that can be obtained) for the player than the judgment) (FIG. 8 (B)).

As shown in FIG. 30, similarly to the special figure 1 operation process (S207), the process related to the special symbol display unit 41 and the large prize device (the first large prize device 31 and the second large prize device 36) is divided into five stages. It is divided and "Special Figure 2 Operation Status 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these stages. Then, when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "1" (YES in S1151), the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) is performed, and when the "special figure 2 operation status" is "2". (NO for S1151, YES for S1153), special symbol 2 variable processing (S1154) is performed, and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "3" (NO for both S1151 and S1153, YES for S1155) ), Perform special symbol 2 confirmation processing (S1156), and if "Special symbol 2 operation status" is "4" (NO for S1151, S1153, S1155, YES for S1157), special electric as a big hit game If the character processing 1 (S1108) is performed and the "special figure 2 operation status" is "5" (all of S1151, S1153, S1155, and S1157 are NO), the special electric character processing as a small hit game is performed. 2 (S1109) is performed. The operation status of Special Figure 2 is "1" by default. Since there is a small hit in the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination, the special figure 2 operation process has a special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) which is not included in the special figure 1 operation process.

Here, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) is a process common to the special figure 1 operation process (S206) and the special figure 2 operation process (S211), and the special electric accessory process 2 (S1109) is Special figure 2 Only the operation process (S211) is processed. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment enables the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol to be executed in parallel, but the jackpot game and the first special symbol related to the first special symbol are executed. This is because it is impossible to execute (only one of them can be executed) in parallel with the big hit game related to the special symbol. In this embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination does not have a small hit, but as another embodiment, the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination may have a small hit. In this case, similarly to the big hit game, the small hit game related to the first special symbol and the small hit game related to the second special symbol cannot be executed in parallel (only one of them can be executed).

[Special symbol 2 standby processing]
Since the special symbol 2 standby process (S1152) shown in FIG. 31 is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 1 standby process (S1102) shown in FIG. 22, description thereof will be omitted.

[Special Figure 2 Win / Loss Judgment Process]
The special figure 2 hit / fail determination process (S1253) shown in FIG. 32 is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 hit / fail determination process (S1203) shown in FIG. 23. However, since this process is related to the special symbol 2, in S1301, the lowest area of the second special figure hold storage unit 85b of the RAM (that is, the RAM area corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) is set. The stored random number counter value (label-TRND-A) for determining whether or not the special symbol is correct is read out. Further, since the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment has a small hit, when it is determined that the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not a big hit (S1304), then in S1305, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. Judge whether the result of is a small hit (S1305). When it is determined in S1305 that it is a small hit (YES in S1305), the small hit symbol is determined (S1306), the special figure 2 small hit fluctuation flag is turned ON (S1307), and the process is completed. Other processing is the same as that of the special figure 1 hit / fail judgment processing (S1203).

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern selection process]
As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, in the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), processing (S1401 to S1420) is performed in the same flow as the special figure 1 variation pattern selection process (S1204) shown in FIGS. 24 and 25. )I do. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since this process is related to the second special symbol, it is based on the variation pattern random number counter value (label-TRND-T1) with reference to the column corresponding to the second special symbol in the variation pattern table shown in FIG. And select the fluctuation pattern. Further, since the result of the second special symbol winning / failing determination has a small hit, when it is determined that the small hit variation flag is ON, the variation pattern is selected from the small hit table according to the game state.

Further, in the state C, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the second special symbol (determination of whether or not the second special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the state C, there are more types of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation times) of the second special symbol than fluctuation patterns of the first special symbol, and variation patterns of various times (which can execute various game effects) are selected. It is possible. Further, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the second special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol is lowered. On the other hand, in the states A and B, the game is mainly performed by displaying the variation of the first special symbol (determination of whether or not the first special symbol is correct). Therefore, in the states A and B, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has more types of variation patterns (fluctuation time) than the variation pattern of the second special symbol, and various time (various game effects) can be produced. It is possible to select a variable pattern (which can be executed). Therefore, in the states A and B, the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol is simplified (there are few types). Further, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to be longer than the fluctuation time of the first special symbol, and the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered.

Further, since the states A and B are game states in which the game is mainly performed by displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function of the second special symbol is disabled and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set. It has been set for a long time. Specifically, when the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is executed in the states A and B, when the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the variation display time of the second special symbol is set to 110 seconds. (P12 or P20). This is set to a fluctuation time shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit in the state A. Further, in the state B, the fluctuation time is set to be shorter than the longest fluctuation time set as the fluctuation display time of the first special symbol when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit.

In the states A and B, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is not the main hit / fail judgment, but if an excessively long fluctuation time is set, the player who made the hit / fail judgment himself / herself executes the jackpot game related to the jackpot. There is a possibility that the game will end. Therefore, if a big hit occurs as a result of the hit / fail judgment, the fluctuation time (the longest one) set in the main first special symbol is not set unnecessarily for a long time. Set a shorter fluctuation time. As a result, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the player is set a variable time in which the player can wait, and the player is inflicted with a disadvantage that the profit from the big hit that he has earned cannot be obtained. Absent. In addition, since the possibility of a big hit is low and the profit obtained is large, such control is used.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination is a small hit, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 1000 seconds (P13 or P21). This is set to a fluctuation time that is even longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. Of the fluctuation display time of the second special symbol that is not the subject in states A and B, the case where the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit is set to a longer fluctuation display time than when it is a big hit or a miss. Set.

Since the states A and B are mainly based on the first special symbol winning / failing determination that does not have a small hit in the result of the winning / failing determination, it is not desirable that the small hits occur frequently due to the execution of the second special symbol winning / failing determination. In addition, if there is a situation in which small hits can occur frequently, a malicious player executes the second special symbol hit / fail judgment even though the game state is mainly based on the first special symbol hit / fail judgment. There is a risk that a small hit will result in a game profit. For example, in a game state in which a left-handed game should be performed, there is a risk that a game profit may be unreasonably obtained due to an inappropriate game such as performing a right-handed game. In order to prevent such a situation, in states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment that is not the main body is a small hit, the fluctuation time is set to a long time (the longest time). It prevents small hits (small hit games) from occurring frequently. Further, since the game profit that can be obtained by one small hit game is not so large, it does not cause much damage to the player who generated the small hit.

Further, in the states A and B, when the result of the second special symbol hit / miss determination is wrong, the fluctuation time of the second special symbol is set to 600 seconds (P14 or P22). This is set to a fluctuation time that is even longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state A. Further, the fluctuation time is set to be longer than the longest fluctuation time that can be set in the first special symbol that is the main body in the state B. In addition, the variation display time of the second special symbol that is not the main body in the states A and B is shorter than when the hit / fail judgment result of the second special symbol is a small hit, and longer than when it is a big hit. Set to. When the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is wrong, by setting the fluctuation time of the second special symbol to a long time, the fluctuation efficiency of the second special symbol is lowered, and the left-handed game should be performed. , Prevent the player from playing an inappropriate game such as playing a right-handed game. In addition, as another aspect, the jackpot and the miss may be the same fluctuation time (for example, both may be 110 seconds, and both may be 600 seconds).

In the special figure 2 variation pattern selection process (S1254), after the variation pattern is selected, another process (S1404) is performed to finish this process. In the other processing (S1404), the variation pattern specification command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM. The set fluctuation pattern specification command is included in the fluctuation start command described later, and is sent to the sub-control board 90 by the output process (S201).

[Special Figure 2 Random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), first, the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is decremented by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b is shifted to the lower side by one (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the uppermost address space of the second special figure reservation storage unit 85b, that is, the RAM corresponding to the fourth RAM of the second special figure reservation (when the upper limit number is stored). Clear the area to 0 (S1503) and finish this process. After executing the special figure 2 random number shift process (S1255), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (S1256) of FIG. 31 is executed. In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (S1256), the special figure 2 operation status is set to "2", the special figure 2 fluctuation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. To do.

[Special symbol 2 processing during change]
The special symbol 2 changing process (S1154) shown in FIG. 36 is processed (S1951 to S1959) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 changing process (S1104) shown in FIG. 27. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation interruption processing]
The special figure 2 fluctuation interruption process (S1952) shown in FIG. 37 is performed (S2951 to S2959) in the same flow as the special figure 1 fluctuation interruption process (S1902) shown in FIG. 28. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted.

[Special symbol 2 confirmation process]
The special symbol 2 finalization process (S1156) shown in FIG. 38 is performed (S2051 to S2067) in the same flow as the special symbol 1 finalization process (S1106) shown in FIG. 29. Therefore, a detailed description of this process will be omitted. However, since the special symbol 2 confirmation process (S1156) is a process related to the special figure 2, the special symbol 1 confirmation process (S1106) includes a big hit type (round counter setting process) and a special symbol 2 small hit fluctuation flag. The processing when it is determined to be ON is different, as shown in FIG. 38.

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (big hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108) will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special electric accessory process 1 (S1108), first, the jackpot game start process (S2101) described later is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2102. In S2102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2102), and when it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON (NO in S2102), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2102 that the jackpot start flag is ON (YES in S2102), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). Here, the jackpot start flag is a flag that is turned ON when the player launches the game ball into the right game area 3B at an arbitrary timing and passes the game ball through the start gate 29 in the jackpot standby state. .. After the special symbol is displayed as a fixed stop with the jackpot symbol and becomes a jackpot, the jackpot start flag is turned on by passing the game ball through the start gate, and the jackpot game proceeds (the round game starts). Here, when the game ball is not passed through the start gate 29 after the big hit, the game machine is maintained in the big hit standby state in which the big hit can be executed. During this time, the player can leave his seat and take a break such as a toilet, a drink, or a telephone. Then, after the break is completed, the game ball is launched at an arbitrary timing of the player, and the game ball is passed through the start gate 29, so that the big hit game can proceed. The big hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31) have been opened (the big hit game has ended) in the big hit game.

When it is determined in S2103 that the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2103), then it is determined whether or not the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30) is open (S2104), and it is determined that it is not open. If so (NO in S2104), is it the time to open the big prize opening (1st big prize opening 30) (round start time), that is, is it time to pass the start gate 29 and start the first round? Or, it is determined whether the time of the interval between rounds has elapsed and it is time to start the next round (next opening) (S2105). If S2105 determines that it is not the round start time (NO in S2105), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2105 that it is time to start the round (YES in S2105), the round start command is set (S2106), the large winning opening processing is performed (S2107), and the processing is completed. As a result, the first big winning opening 30 is opened according to the opening pattern (see FIG. 6) according to the type of big hit.

If it is determined by S2104 that the big winning opening (1st big winning opening 30) is open (YES in S2104), the maximum number of balls that can be entered into the large winning opening in that round is the specified maximum number of balls (this implementation). In Example 1, it is determined whether or not the number has reached 10 per round (S2111). If it is determined that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2111), then whether or not it is time to close the large winning opening (1st large winning opening 30), that is, the large winning opening It is determined whether or not a predetermined opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed since the opening time (S2112). If it is determined by S2112 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2112), the process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2111 that the specified number of balls (10) has been reached (YES in S2111), or when it is determined that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2112). That is, when it is determined that any of the two round end conditions is satisfied, a process of closing the large winning opening (first large winning opening 30) is performed (S2113). Next, the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2114), and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is "0" (S2115). If it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is not "0" (NO in S2115), the process ends in order to start the next round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2115 that the value of the round counter is "0" (YES in S2115), the jackpot ending command is set (S2116) as the jackpot end process to end the jackpot game, and the jackpot ending period. (S2117), turn on the jackpot end flag (S2118), and finish the process. Further, when it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2103), since the final round has ended, it is then determined whether or not the jackpot ending period has passed (S2119). If it is determined in S2119 that the predetermined ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2119), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2119 that the ending period has passed (YES in S2119), the jackpot end flag is turned off (S2120), the game state setting process described later is performed (S2121), and the jackpot flag is turned off (S2122). , The jackpot start flag is turned off (S2123), the special figure operation status setting process 1 described later is performed (S2124), and the process is completed.

[Big hit game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (S2101) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the jackpot game start process (S2101), it is first determined whether or not the jackpot start flag is ON (S2151), and it is determined that the jackpot start flag is not ON, that is, the start gate 29 has not yet passed in the jackpot standby state. If (NO in S2151), then it is determined whether the probability change flag is ON (S2152), and if it is determined that the probability change flag is ON (YES in S2152), the probability change flag is set to OFF (S2102), and S2154 Move to processing. In S2154, it is determined whether or not the state B flag is ON (S2103), and when it is determined that the state B flag is ON (YES in 2154), the state B flag is turned OFF (S2104) and the process proceeds to S2156. .. That is, during the execution of the big hit game, the probability change flag and the state B flag are turned off before the start of the big hit game (round game) in order to control the low probability state and the low base state.

If it is determined in S2152 that the probability change flag is not ON (NO in S2152), the process proceeds to S2154 without turning off the probability change flag. If it is determined in S2154 that the state B flag is not ON (NO in S2154), the process proceeds to S2156 without turning off the state B flag. In S2156, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed the start gate (S2156), and if it is determined that the game ball has passed the start gate (YES in S2156), the jackpot game is started (the round game is opened). Turn on the jackpot start flag (S2157) and finish the process. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2156 that the gate has not passed the start gate (NO in S2156), the process ends. As a result, the game machine continues in the jackpot standby state. Further, when it is determined in S2151 that the jackpot start flag is ON, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot game has already started (S2151), the process ends. As a result, the player can start (advance) the jackpot game at an arbitrary timing.

[Game status setting process]
Next, the game state setting process (S2121) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the game state setting process (S2121), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game completed this time is related to the probability variation jackpot (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, five types of 15R first jackpot, 4R second jackpot, 4R third jackpot, 15R fifth jackpot, and 4R sixth jackpot are set as probabilistic jackpots, and in S2201, the jackpot games are these. It is determined whether or not it corresponds to any of the five types. Then, when it is determined that the probability variation jackpot has ended this time (YES in S2201), the probability variation flag is turned ON (S2202), and then the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 4R 6th jackpot. Determine if it exists (S2203).

When it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is either the 4R 3rd jackpot or the 4R 6th jackpot (YES in S2203), the state B flag is turned ON (S2204), and "10000" is set in the state B counter. Set (S2205) and finish the process. As a result, a high base state of up to 10,000 times is set after the jackpot game is completed, and the high accuracy high base state is obtained. It is not possible to execute the variable display of the special symbol 10,000 times during the business hours of the game store in a day. Therefore, by setting "10000" in the status B counter, the next big hit is substantially generated. It means that the high base state (state B) is continued until. It should be noted that the control may be changed to maintain the high base state (state) until the next big hit occurs by changing the number of times such as “10000” times in the state B.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2203 that the completed jackpot game is neither the 4R 3rd jackpot nor the 4R 6th jackpot (NO in S2203), that is, the completed jackpot game is the 15R 1st jackpot, 4R 2nd jackpot, Or, if it is determined that it is one of the 15R 5th jackpots (NO in S2203), the process ends with the state B flag turned off. As a result, the game state after the jackpot game ends becomes a high-accuracy low-base state.

When it is determined in S2201 that the end is not a probability variation jackpot, that is, a low probability jackpot (low probability jackpot, normal jackpot) (NO in S2201), the state B flag is turned ON (S2206), and the status B counter is set. Set "100" (S2207) and finish the process. As a result, the high base state of 100 times is set after the big hit game is completed, and the low accuracy high base state is obtained.

The game control microcomputer 81 (main control unit 80) that executes the game state setting process (S2121) functions as a “game state control means”.

[Special figure operation status setting process 1]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure operation status setting process 1 (S2124), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON (S3001), and the special figure 1 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is a special symbol. If it is determined that the item is related to 1 (YES in S3001), the special figure 1 jackpot flag is turned off (S3002), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3003), and the process is completed. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. On the other hand, in S3001, when it is determined that the special figure 1 jackpot flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 jackpot flag is ON, that is, the jackpot game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3001). ), Turn off the special figure 2 jackpot flag (S3004), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3005), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small hit game)]
Next, the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special electric accessory processing 2 (S1109), first, it is determined whether or not the small hit end flag is ON (S2301). The small hit end flag is a flag indicating that all the opening of the large winning device (second large winning device 36) has been completed in the small hit game. When it is determined that the small hit end flag is not ON (NO in S2301), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is open (S2302). If S2302 determines that the big winning opening is not open (NO in S2302), it is time to open the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35), that is, the opening time of the small hit has passed. Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to start the first opening operation, or whether it is time to start the next opening operation after the time of the interval between the multiple opening operations has elapsed (S2303). .. Regarding the small hit game, regardless of the passage of the start gate, the small hit game (opening operation) starts after a predetermined time has elapsed after the fixed stop display of the small hit symbol. That is, the player can arbitrarily determine the start time of the big hit game by the start gate, but cannot arbitrarily determine the start time of the small hit.

If S2303 determines that it is not the time to open the big prize opening (NO in S2303), the process ends as it is. On the other hand, when S2303 determines that it is time to open the large winning opening (YES in S2303), the opening processing of the second large winning opening 35 is performed according to the small hit opening pattern (see FIG. 6) (S2304). To finish. When it is determined by S2302 that the large winning opening (second large winning opening 35) is being opened (YES in S2302), the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the opening operation of 6 times, that is, 6 times It is determined whether or not the total number of the game balls entered in the opening operation has reached the specified maximum number of entered balls (10 in the first embodiment) (S2306). If it is determined by S2306 that the specified number of balls (10) has not been reached (NO in S2306), it is time to close the big winning opening, that is, after opening the big winning opening, the predetermined number It is determined whether or not the opening time (see FIG. 6) has elapsed (S2307). Then, when it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has not passed (NO in S2307), the process is completed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the number of balls entered into the large winning opening during the six opening operations has reached the specified number of balls (10) (YES in S2306), the large winning opening (second major winning) The mouth 35) is closed (S2314), and the process shifts to the small hit end processing of S2311. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2307 that the opening time of the big winning opening has passed (YES in S2307), the big winning opening (second big winning opening 35) is closed (S2308), and the value of the small hit opening counter is set. One decrement is performed (S2309), and it is determined whether or not the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (S2310). When it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is not "0" (NO in S2310), the next opening operation is started, so the process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2310 that the value of the small hit opening counter is "0" (YES in S2310), the process proceeds to the small hit end processing of S2311. In S2311, as the small hit end process for ending the small hit game, the small hit ending command is set (S2311), the small hit ending period is started (S2312), the small hit end flag is set (S2313), and the small hit end flag is set. Finish the process. The small hit opening counter becomes "0" when the large winning opening is opened 6 times.

In addition, when it is determined in S2301 that the small hit end flag is ON (YES in S2301), the opening operation of 6 times has been completed (or a specified number of game balls have been entered). If it is determined whether or not the ending time of the small hit has elapsed (S2315) and it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2315), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S2315 that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2315), the small hit end flag is turned off (S2316), the special figure operation status setting process 2 is performed (S2317), and the process is completed. By generating a small hit game in a high accuracy and low base state, it is possible to aim for the next big hit while increasing the number of balls held, which enhances the interest of the game. It should be noted that the probability change flag and the state B flag are not switched from ON to OFF or switched from OFF to ON at the start of the small hit game. Further, at the end of the small hit game, the game state setting process is not performed. That is, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming state (probability state, base state) is not changed before and after the execution of the small hit game.

[Special figure operation status setting process 2]
Next, the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317) will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special figure operation status setting process 2 (S2317), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON (S3101), and the special figure 1 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time. Is determined to be related to the special symbol 1 (YES in S3101), the special figure 1 small hit flag is turned off (S3102), the special figure 1 operation status is set to "1" (S3103), and the process is performed. Finish. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 1 standby process is executed again as the special figure 1 operation process. In this embodiment, since the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination does not have a small hit, the special figure 1 small hit flag is not turned ON. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 small hit flag is not ON, that is, the special figure 2 small hit flag is ON, that is, the small hit game generated this time is related to the special symbol 2 (NO in S3101). ), Turn off the special figure 2 small hit flag (S3104), set the special figure 2 operation status to "1" (S3105), and finish the process. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the special symbol 2 standby process is executed again as the special figure 2 operation process.

[Holded ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball number processing (S209) after the special drawing 2 operation processing (S208). As shown in FIG. 45, in the reserved ball number processing (S209), first, the special figure 1 reserved ball number, the special figure 2 reserved ball number, and the normal symbol reserved ball number stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read out ( S2501). Next, the data of the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls command for transmitting the reserved ball number information to the sub-control board 90 or the like) is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502), and the process is completed.

[Power failure monitoring process]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a power failure monitoring process (S210) after the hold ball number process (S209). As shown in FIG. 46, in the power cutoff monitoring process (S210), first, it is determined whether or not there is an input of the power cutoff signal (S2601), and when it is determined that there is no input (NO in S2601), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined by S2601 that there is an input of a power cutoff signal (YES in S2601), the current state of the game machine (whether it is a probability change, whether it is a hit game, the number of reserved balls is several, the probability change / time reduction Data related to (the number of remaining fluctuations is several, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned on (S2603), and then loop processing (infinite loop) is performed without returning to interrupt processing (FIG. 11).

As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment has the above-mentioned characteristic configuration, and thus has a unique effect not found in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, or is compared with the conventional pachinko gaming machine. It has a remarkable effect. The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment is a big hit in the judgment of whether or not the special symbol is correct (the first special symbol (also referred to as "first information") or the second special symbol (also referred to as "second information") is a big hit. A high-probability state occurs (a privilege is given) based on a symbol (also referred to as a "specific display mode"), and a high-probability state (a privilege) is satisfied when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Is supposed to end.

The process of granting this high-probability state (privilege) (game state setting process (S2121)) can also be referred to as "privilege granting means". It should be noted that the first special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the second special symbol and the effect symbol 8 are interlocked (synchronized), and the variation display and the stop display are performed to show the same pass / fail judgment result. , "The special symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) is stopped and displayed at the jackpot symbol" can be replaced with "the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the hit effect symbol (specific display mode)". ..

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 (control processing by the sub control unit 90) will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 52. The counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (sub-control unit). When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 47 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. As shown in the figure, in the sub-control main process, first, the CPU initialization process is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization process (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller) and other settings, various flags, status and counter resets are performed.

Subsequently, the S4002 determines whether or not the power cutoff signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the determination result is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the determination result is YES (YES in S4002), the process proceeds to S4004 without initializing the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, if the power off signal is not ON, or if the contents of the RAM are not normal even if the power off signal is ON (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but due to a power failure or the like. If the power off signal is turned on but the contents of the RAM are kept normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. Initializing the RAM resets the values of various flags, statuses and counters. Note that S4001 to S4003 are executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and are not executed after that. Further, in the first embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 also performs the same processing as the power supply cutoff monitoring process (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and the power supply cutoff signal is generated due to a power failure or the like. When it is turned on, the data related to the effect control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. That is, the data related to the effect control when a power failure such as a power failure occurs is backed up. Therefore, unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) when the power is turned on (when the power is restored) after the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the effect control by the effect control microcomputer 91 is performed. The state of is returned to the state before the power failure occurred.

The S4004 disables interrupts. Next, the random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining the effect are updated. The updated random number counter values are sequentially stored in a predetermined updated value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining the effect include random numbers for determining the variable effect that determine the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, random numbers for determining the advance notice effect that determines the advance notice effect, and for determining the effect symbol that determines the effect symbol. There are random numbers and so on. The random number update method can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. When updating the random numbers, the random numbers may not be added one by one, but may be added two by two. The random number for determining the effect is acquired at a predetermined timing. As this timing, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) notifying that the starting ball has arrived is transmitted from the main control board 80, or a control signal notifying the start of fluctuation from the main control board 80 ( It can be used when a fluctuation start command) is transmitted, or when a fluctuation effect pattern described later is determined. The storage location of the acquired random number for determining the effect is a predetermined random number counter value storage area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also referred to as “sub-output buffer”) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are controlled by the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp. Among the boards 107, the command is transmitted to the control board to which the corresponding command is transmitted. Each control board (each control unit) that has received the command uses various effect devices (image display device, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable decorative member 14, etc.) according to the received command. (Direction design game production, special game production related to hit game, etc.) is executed. The effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently enables interrupts (S4007). After that, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4008), the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) can be executed. By executing these control processes, display control of the effect symbols and the like executed on each display screen of the image display device 7 (first image display device), the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72. It is also possible to control the lighting of various lamps, control the operation of movable decorative members, control the sound output from speakers, and the like.

[Receive interrupt processing]
Next, the reception interrupt processing (S4008) will be described with reference to FIG. 48. In the reception interrupt processing (S4008), first, whether or not the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether or not the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 is input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 91. Judge (S4101). Then, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in S4101 that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), various commands transmitted from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub control board 90 (S4102), and the process is completed. .. This receive interrupt process (S4008) is a process that is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009) will be described with reference to FIG. 49. The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 2 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 2ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), first, input processing for creating switch data (edge data and level data) is performed based on the detection signals from the effect button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, the lamp data output process (S4202) for outputting the lamp data for causing the lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 to emit light, and the drive data for driving the movable decorative member 14 (electrical drive source) are output. Drive data output processing (S4203) is performed. The lamp data and the drive data are created by the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, the watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer is performed (S4204).

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) will be described with reference to FIG. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the sub-control board 90. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, the received command analysis process (S4302) described later is performed. Next, a switch state acquisition process (S4303) is performed in which the switch data created by the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the switch stored in the switch state acquisition process is performed. A switch process for setting the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the data is performed (S4304). After that, other processing such as creating lamp data (data for controlling the lighting of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66) and updating the random number for determining the effect is executed (S4305).

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. In the reception command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not the start entry command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401), and when it is determined that the start entry command has not been received (NO in S4401). , When it is determined that the start entry command has been received (YES in S4401), the process shifts to the process of S4403, and the effect hold information storage process (S4402) is performed to shift to the process of S4403. The effect hold information storage process (S4402) is a random operation for determining the jackpot type (preliminary judgment result, jackpot type determination) included in the start entry command (special figure 1 start entry command or special figure 2 start entry command) received by S4401. Game information such as numerical values and fluctuation pattern random values) is set according to the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) and the number of special symbol reserved balls when sending and receiving the start entry command (at the time of command generation). , It is stored in a predetermined effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 in the shift memory format. For example, when the received start-in ball command is the special figure 1 start-in ball command corresponding to the number of reserved balls "4" in special figure 1, the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the special figure 1 start-in ball command. Etc. are stored as the special figure 1 effect hold information in the area corresponding to the number of holds 4 in the special figure 1 effect hold information storage area. The effect hold information stored in this way is used for executing various effects such as a variable effect, a notice effect, and an effect mode, which will be described later. The storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area in the sub-control board 90 is the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure) in the main control board (main control unit) 80 described above. It matches the stored contents (acquired information) of the hold storage unit). From this, it can be said that the effect holding information storage area of the sub-control board 90 is also a “acquisition information storage means”.

Next, in S4403, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403), and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4403), the variation effect start processing (YES) described later ( S4404) is performed to shift to the processing of S4405, and when it is determined that the fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4403), the processing shifts to the processing of S4405 without performing the fluctuation effect start processing. In S4405, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405), and when it is determined that the fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4405), the effect symbol is stopped and displayed to display the variation effect. The variable effect end process to be terminated is performed (S4406). In the variation effect end process (S4406), a variation effect end command for stopping and displaying the effect symbol 8 and ending the variation effect is set in the sub output buffer. When the set variable effect end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 changes the effect symbol 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The stop display is displayed, and the variable effect (effect pattern game effect) is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in S4405 that the fluctuation stop command has not been received (NO in S4405), the process shifts to the processing of S4407 without performing the fluctuation production end processing. The variable effect refers to various effects performed according to the variable display of the special symbol.

Subsequently, the S4407 determines whether or not a hit game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4407). Here, the hit game-related command is a command transmitted from the main control board 80 when executing the hit game (big hit game, small hit game), and specifically, the start of the big hit game (generation of big hit). ), The opening command sent at the start of the round, the round end command sent at the end of the round, the ending command sent at the end of the jackpot game, the first big prize opening in the round game The 1st big winning opening command sent based on the entry into 30 and the 2nd big winning opening entry command sent based on the entry into the 2nd big winning opening in the small hit game are applicable. .. The S4407 determines whether or not any of these jackpot game-related commands has been received, and if it has not been received (NO in S4407), it shifts to the processing of S4409 and if it has been received (YES in S4407). , Performs processing related to the execution of the effect (big hit game effect, small hit game effect) according to the type of the received command (S4408).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies the opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub output buffer, and if it is a round start command, the command is concerned. Set the round effect command in the sub output buffer to specify the round effect according to the round specified based on, and if it is the ending command, specify the ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command. Set the production command in the sub output buffer. If the received command is a big winning opening command (1st big winning opening command, 2nd big winning opening ball command), the big winning opening specified based on the command (1st big winning) A ball entry command that specifies the entry effect according to the entry into the opening 30 and the second large winning opening 35) is set in the sub output buffer. When various effect commands related to the set hit game are transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 performs an opening effect and a round according to the progress of the hit game. The effect, the ball entry effect, and the like are executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Finally, the processing of S4409 is performed, and this processing is completed. In S4409, as other processing, processing based on other reception commands (for example, normal symbol fluctuation start command and normal symbol fluctuation stop command) other than the above-mentioned various commands is performed (S4409).

[Variation production start processing]
Next, the variation effect start process (S4404) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the variation effect start process (S4404), first, the effect determination random number process (S4501) is performed to acquire various effect determination random numbers such as the variation effect determination random number, the advance notice effect determination random number, and the effect symbol determination random number. In this embodiment, the processing of S4501 is performed at the timing when the fluctuation start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquisition information) is acquired from each random number. Based on the acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) to be executed, the mode of the advance notice effect (including the presence or absence of the advance notice effect), the effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined.

Next, the S4502 analyzes the received fluctuation start command (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating the variation pattern) that specifies the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Then, the fluctuation pattern designation command includes the fluctuation pattern information (P1 to P33) shown in FIG. 9, the game state information for designating the current game state, and the determination of the first special symbol hit / miss judgment or the second special symbol hit / miss judgment. The result, symbol information for specifying the jackpot type, and the like are included (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are one corresponding to the first special symbol and the other corresponding to the second special symbol in the fluctuation pattern designation command, the effect symbol game production to be started this time is performed by analyzing the fluctuation pattern designation command. It is possible to determine whether the (variable display of the effect symbol) is related to the special figure 1 or the special figure 2. The variation pattern information, the game state information, the symbol information, and the like can be used in other processes other than the variation effect start process to be executed thereafter.

Next, in S4503, the effect control microcomputer 91 refers to the current mode status (S4503). The mode status is for determining the effect mode to be executed. The mode status is any value from "1" to "5", and each value is assigned to the effect modes A to E. Specifically, the mode status "1" corresponds to the production mode A, the mode status "2" corresponds to the production mode B, the mode status "3" corresponds to the production mode C, and the mode status "4" corresponds to the production mode C. It corresponds to the production mode D, and the mode status "5" corresponds to the production mode E. By referring to the current mode status, it is possible to specify the current production mode.

Here, the effect mode is an aspect of the effect mainly using the image display device 7, and if the effect mode is different, a part or all of the effect modes of the game effect such as the advance notice effect and the reach effect are different. .. Specifically, the image displayed on the image display device 7 is different depending on the effect mode, such as different aspects of the effect symbol 8 (for example, symbol design, number design, etc.), different characters, items, and background images. It will be different. In addition, the effect design game effect can also be executed in a mode corresponding to the effect mode, and when a plurality of game effects (notice effect, reach effect, etc.) are provided, different game effects can be executed depending on the effect mode. Can be. In this embodiment, the effect modes A and B are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the low accuracy and low base state, the effect modes C and D are executed when the effect mode is controlled to the high accuracy and low base state, and the effect mode E is executed. Is executed when controlled to the low accuracy high base state and when controlled to the high accuracy high base state. Therefore, when the effect mode is any of A to D, the player confirms the effect mode to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy low base state or the high accuracy low base state. It becomes possible. On the other hand, when the production mode is E, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the low accuracy high base state or the high accuracy high base state even if the production mode is confirmed. is there. In that sense, the effect mode E can be said to be a game state non-notification mode.

Next, in the S4504, the image display device 7, the board lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are used, and the variation effect pattern (variation effect pattern, effect pattern) controlled mainly by the sub control unit 90. A variable effect pattern determination table (not shown) and a notice effect determination table for determining the game effect) are set (S4504). Specifically, the variation effect pattern determination table to be used and the advance notice effect determination table are set based on the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 and the variation pattern specification command received from the main control unit 80. .. That is, a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables and a plurality of advance notice effect determination tables are provided, and a predetermined variable effect pattern determination table and advance notice effect determination table are set from them based on the game state (effect mode) and the like. To do. For example, when the variation pattern information specified by the received variation pattern specification command is "P1 (variation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9), the variation effect pattern determination table is used as the variation effect pattern determination table at the time of a big hit corresponding to the current effect mode. A variable effect pattern determination table and a notice effect determination table are set. The variable effect pattern determination table is mainly for determining the execution mode (variable mode of the effect symbol, etc.) of the effect symbol game effect, and is a plurality of variable effect pattern determination tables corresponding to the effect mode (mode status). (Not shown) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90 in advance. In S4504, the table corresponding to the mode status (current effect mode) referred to in S4503 is selected and set from those variable effect pattern determination tables.

Next, in S4505, based on the random number for determining the variation effect acquired in S4501 and the variation effect pattern determination table set in S4504, a variation effect pattern suitable for the specified variation pattern is selected and set ( S4505). As the variation effect pattern, a variation mode (execution mode of the effect symbol game effect) of the effect symbol 8 displayed mainly in the effect symbol display area 7b is set. As a result, in the effect symbol game effect, when the reach effect is executed (reach-existing effect symbol game effect) or when the character effect performed using a specific character is executed (character effect symbol game effect), the reach effect or character When the production is not executed (reach no production design game production), etc. are determined. In the reach effect, for example, as a display mode of the effect symbol 8 when the result of the special symbol hit / fail determination is a big hit, all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (doublet). In the case where the mode (big hit mode, specific mode) is provided, two of the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped display (temporary stop display) with the symbols constituting the jackpot mode (same effect symbol). ), And with the remaining one continuing the variable display (scroll display), whether or not the remaining one effect symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol (three same effect symbols) that completes the jackpot mode. It is a production that shows. At this time, a game effect is executed using a predetermined character along with the variable display of the effect symbol, and whether or not the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode is determined by whether or not the predetermined character achieves the predetermined purpose. It is also possible to show by the production of. Such a game production (reach production or character production described later) can also be referred to as a story production (specific game production) or a purpose production (specific game production). As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for a big hit and enhance the game interest.

Further, in S4505, the effect symbol 8 (also referred to as “stop effect symbol”) to be stopped and displayed is determined and set based on the random number for determining the effect symbol acquired in S4501 and the stop symbol determination table (not shown). Production symbol The production symbol 8 that is stopped and displayed as a result of the game production is out of the result of the special symbol hit / fail judgment, and if there is a reach, there are three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "787". One of the production symbols is considered to be different from the other production symbols, and when there is no reach, at least one of the three production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R such as "635" is the other. It is said that the production pattern is different

Further, in S4506, the advance notice effect (notice effect pattern) to be executed according to the variable effect pattern (effect pattern game effect) is determined. In addition, it is also referred to as a production design game production including this execution notice production. This notice effect shows the possibility that the result of the effect symbol game effect being executed is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode before the effect symbol is stopped or displayed (fixed stop display) (during the variable display of the effect symbol). Notification production). In S4506, based on the random number for determining the advance notice effect acquired in S4501 and the advance notice effect determination table set in S4504, the specified variation pattern and the advance notice effect (preliminary effect pattern) matching the determined variation effect pattern are selected. , Set this (S4506).

Then, in S4507, based on the variation effect pattern and the advance notice effect set in S4505 and S4506, the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect and the like is set in the output buffer in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 ( S4507), the variable production start process is completed. When the variation effect start command set in S4507 is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 determines the variation effect pattern specified based on the variation effect start command, that is, S4505. The predetermined image data corresponding to the variation effect pattern set in 1 is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the variation effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display (blinking display) by the two LEDs on the effect display 102 is also executed.

[Outline of production design game production]
Next, the outline of the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) of this embodiment will be described. As described above, when the variation effect start command for starting the effect symbol game effect based on the variation effect pattern set in S4505 is transmitted from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, the image display device 7 The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is started on the display screen 7a of. As a series of effects from the start to the end (stop) of the variable display of the effect symbol 8, the effect symbol game effect (variable effect) is configured.

As a general rule, the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is a vertically scrolled display of the symbols in the order of "1" → "2" → "3" ... → "7" → "8" → "9" (ascending order). (Vertical scrolling), and when it reaches "9", it returns to "1" and repeats vertical scrolling. The mode of the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is determined by the variation effect pattern stored in the variation effect pattern determination table described above. For this reason, in addition to vertical scrolling, there are various modes of variable display, such as horizontal scrolling display (horizontal scrolling) and switching display in which symbols (numbers) are sequentially switched on the spot without scrolling. It is possible to provide the mode as a variable effect pattern. It is also possible to provide a mode in which the symbols "1" to "9" are variablely displayed in descending order. Further, it is also possible to set the mode of variable display depending on the effect mode and the game state.

Further, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed according to the variation time determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the variation display is stopped as the variation time elapses. However, in the present embodiment, the variation display is stopped. It has a plurality of stop modes (stop patterns) as modes. Specifically, as the main stop modes, (1) the stop order (also referred to as "stop order") of each of the effects symbols 8L (left symbol), 8C (middle symbol), and 8R (right symbol) is "left symbol". → Stop mode in which the middle symbol → right symbol (also referred to as “first stop mode”) and (2) Stop mode in which the stop order of each symbol is “left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol” (“1st stop mode”) (Also referred to as "second stop mode") and (3) stop mode (also referred to as "third stop mode") in which all stop timings (stop timings) of each symbol are substantially the same (also referred to as "simultaneous stop"). And (4) a stop mode (also referred to as a "fourth stop mode") in which the stop time of the left symbol and the right symbol is substantially the same and the middle symbol is stopped after that. These stop modes (stop patterns) are included in the execution mode of the effect symbol game effect, and the change effect pattern selected (set) in S4505 determines in which stop mode the variation display is stopped. It has become a thing. That is, in this embodiment, the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern also serves as the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). However, it is also possible to separately process the selection / determination (setting) of the variation effect pattern and the selection / determination (setting) of the stop mode (stop pattern). The stop symbol with the first stop order is also called the "first stop symbol", the stop symbol with the second stop order is also called the "second stop symbol", and the stop symbol with the third stop order is the third stop symbol. This is also called a "third stop symbol" or a "final stop symbol".

Of the first to fourth stop modes, in the first stop mode (left symbol → middle symbol → right symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is “small” mainly in the effect mode C (state C). This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the "hit".

In the second stop mode (left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is “missing” or “big hit” mainly in (1) effect modes A and B (state A). When the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed based on the above, (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". When the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed in a variation mode with reach (also referred to as “reach variation”) or a variation mode without reach (also referred to as “normal variation”) based on the above, and (3) effect mode C (3) In the state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation or the normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing" or "big hit", the variation display is performed. This is a stop mode that can be executed when the device is stopped.

The third stop mode (simultaneous stop of all symbols) is mainly under the condition (1) in the production modes A and B (state A) that the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of special figure reserved balls works (at the start of fluctuation). Special figure 1 When the number of reserved balls is "3" or "4"), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing", and based on this, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation. , (2) In the effect mode E (state B), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination being "off", and (3) ) In the effect mode C (state C), when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed with normal variation based on the result of the second special symbol hit / fail determination being "missing", the variation display is stopped. This is a feasible stop mode.

In the fourth stop mode (simultaneous stop of left and right symbols → middle symbol), the result of the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit" mainly in the effect mode C (state C). Based on this, when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation, and (2) in the effect mode E (state B), the result of the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is "missing" or "big hit". This is a stop mode that can be executed when the variation display is stopped when the variation display of the effect symbol 8 is performed by the reach variation based on the above.

In this way, a plurality of stop modes for stopping the variable display of the effect symbol 8 are provided according to the effect mode (game state), the variable display mode based on the result of the special symbol hit / miss determination, and the result (stop display mode). Therefore, it is possible to make the stopping mode different according to the situation of the game. Further, for the player, paying attention to the stop mode when the variable display of the effect symbol 8 is stopped, it is possible to infer the display mode (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 to be displayed (derived display) thereafter. It becomes possible, and it is also possible to infer the type of special game that can be executed, the presence / absence of the execution, the possibility, and the like through the stop mode. As a result, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the stopping mode when the variable display is stopped, and to arouse the expectation for the subsequent special game.

In addition to the first to fourth stop modes, for example, the stop order of the three symbols constituting the effect symbol 8 is "right symbol-> left symbol-> middle symbol" (fifth stop mode). ), And various stop modes such as a stop mode in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are stopped at substantially the same stop time and the right symbol is stopped after that (sixth stop mode), and each stop can be provided. The conditions under which the embodiment is executed are not limited to this embodiment, and can be variously defined.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbols "1" to "9" constituting the effect symbol 8 are colored so that they can be classified by color, and the type of symbol (symbol type) is determined by the color. This symbol type corresponds to the game state (effect mode). Specifically, in the state A (effect modes A and B), "7" among the odd-numbered symbols is a red symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as "red symbol"), and other odd-numbered symbols "1" and "3". , "5", "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"), and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter "blue"). It is also called "design"). On the other hand, in states B and C (effect modes C, D and E), among the odd-numbered symbols, "3", "5" and "7" are red symbols, and the other odd-numbered symbols are "1" and "9". Is a green symbol, and even-numbered symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols.

It should be noted that the correspondence between the design and the color shown in this embodiment is merely an example, and it is possible to adopt other correspondences, and the type of color is not limited to this embodiment, and other colors are used. Can be used. Further, in this embodiment, the symbol type (red symbol, green symbol, blue symbol) is determined by the color, but it can also be determined by an element other than the color. For example, the type of character when a character is attached to the effect symbol, and the number symbol when having an effect symbol (character symbol) representing a predetermined character in addition to the effect symbol (number symbol) representing a number. The symbol type may be determined by the character symbol, and further, the symbol type may be determined simply by the odd symbol and the even symbol.

The variable display of the effect symbol 8 is performed, and the symbol combination (stop display mode) of the effect symbol 8 (8L, 8C, 8R) displayed (derivated display) when the variable display is stopped according to the above-mentioned stop mode is used. The result of the fluctuation display is notified. In this embodiment, as a basic symbol combination (stop display mode), there are "completely disjointed eyes" ("124", etc.) in which all three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are different symbols (numbers), and the effect symbols. 8L (left symbol) and production symbol 8R (right symbol) are the same symbol (number), and the remaining production symbol 8C (middle symbol) is a different symbol (number), such as "reach barrage" ("343"). ) Is an out-of-order mode (non-specific mode) that does not trigger the execution of the winning game. On the other hand, "doublet" ("777", etc.) in which all three production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same is used as a jackpot mode (specific mode) that triggers the execution of a jackpot game (see FIG. 6) of 4R or more. There is.

On the premise of such a basic combination of symbols, in this embodiment, the "reach barrage" among the loose stitches is also used as the 2R jackpot mode that triggers the execution of the 2R jackpot game (see FIG. 6). .. This is because the number of prize balls (the number of prize balls won) that a player can acquire is smaller in the 2R jackpot game than in the 4R or higher jackpot game (4R jackpot game, 15R jackpot game), and the state C (high). It is a special game that triggers the setting of state B (high base state), which makes it more difficult to obtain a prize ball (increase the number of balls held) in a small hit game than (probability low base state), that is, for the player. This is because it is a special game with a relatively low degree of advantage (profit amount). Further, among the loose stitches, the "completely loose stitch" is also used as the small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (second special symbol) in the state B (high base state). This is because, as described above, in the state B, the second starting port 21 is in the open state for most of the time, so that the small hit large winning opening (second) located on the downstream side of the second starting port 21. This is because it is difficult to enter the large winning opening 35), and it is extremely unlikely that a small hit will be profitable (nearly zero) (substantially equivalent to a loss). Further, among the loose stitches, the "specific loose stitch" described later is set as a small hit mode that triggers the execution of the small hit game (small hit of the second special symbol) in the state C (high accuracy and low base state). Here, the small hit mode (specific disparity) is also referred to as a "first display mode", and the big hit mode (doublet) is also referred to as a "second display mode", and the disengagement mode (complete disparity, reach disparity). Of the (eyes), the reach-separated number is also referred to as a "third display mode", and among the out-of-order modes (completely disjointed eyes, reach disjointed eyes), the completely disjointed eye is also referred to as a "fourth display mode".

Since the state A (low probability low base state) is a game state in which a left-handed game is basically performed, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (the first) based mainly on the entry of the ball into the first starting port 20. 1) Special symbol variation display) is performed, and the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (second special symbol variation display) is rarely performed during the variation display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made under such circumstances, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation is caused by the effect display 102. Only display (and stop display) is to be performed. Similarly, the state B (high base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, and the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (first special) mainly based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 21. (Fluctuating display of symbols) is performed, and it is rare that the second special symbol hit / fail judgment (variable display of the second special symbol) is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol. When the second special symbol hit / fail judgment is made below, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the variation display by the effect display 102 ( And stop display) only.

Similarly, since the state C (high accuracy and low base state) is a game state in which a right-handed game is basically performed, the second special symbol hit / fail judgment mainly based on the entry into the third starting port 26 ( (Variation display of the second special symbol) is performed, and since it is rare that the first special symbol hit / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed during the variation display of the second special symbol, this is performed. When the first special symbol hit / fail determination is performed under such a situation, the variation display of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to this is not performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, but is performed by the effect display 102. Only variable display (and stop display) is to be performed.

However, when a special symbol hit / fail judgment contrary to the current game state (left-handed game, right-handed game) is performed and a judgment result of "big hit" is obtained (for example, in state C, the first special symbol hit / fail judgment is made. (When a big hit is made), one or more of the image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and the third image display device 72 display an effect suggesting the occurrence of the big hit. Do. As a result, while the effect display (variation effect) of the effect symbol 8 corresponding to the current gaming state (variation display of the main special symbol) is mainly performed on the display screen 7a, the effect display is performed in parallel with the variation display of the main special symbol. It is possible to inform the player that the result of the variable display of the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, by suggesting the occurrence of such a big hit, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player stops the game without noticing the occurrence of the big hit and misses the opportunity to earn a profit.

[Other aspects]
Further, in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state, the high accuracy high base state is a specification that continues until the next big hit occurs. When the game state after the big hit game is set to the high accuracy high base state by changing to such a big hit type, or in addition to such a big hit type, a predetermined number of times in the high accuracy high base state. If the jackpot is not reached until the variation display of the special symbol (50 or 100) is completed, a jackpot type may be provided in which the gaming state changes to the high accuracy and low base state. By providing such a big hit type, the game state after the big hit game ends becomes a high base state, and when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times in the high base state, it depends on the big hit type and then. There are a case where the gaming state shifts to the low probability low base state, a case where the high accuracy high base state is continued, and a case where the game state shifts to the high accuracy low base state.

As a result, it is possible to diversify the changing mode (transition mode) of the gaming state, enhance the game playability, and enhance the gaming interest. In addition, by executing a common game effect in a high base state from the end of the big hit game to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times, the variation display of the special symbol a predetermined number of times is executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which gaming state to shift to after the execution of. As a result, the player's playing interest in the high base state is enhanced, and the expectation for an advantageous state is increased. Further, as a result, even if the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is not the high-accuracy low-base state but the high-accuracy low-base state, the game state changes to the high-accuracy low-base state after a predetermined number of fluctuations. It will be possible to play the game in anticipation of. In addition, this makes it possible to maintain the game entertainment for a long period of time.

Further, in the first embodiment, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b) and the second special symbol display (variable state display 49 c1 and c2). ) Are all displayed and controlled by the main control unit. Instead of such an aspect, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second special symbol display (variation). The display control of c1 and c2) of the status display 49 may be performed by another control unit such as a sub control unit. As a result, even if a problem occurs in the display control of one control unit, if the display control of the other control is appropriate, it is possible to notify the correct game information. Further, both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display shall be provided on the same display unit (main display 40). As a result, a first special symbol display controlled by the main control unit and a second special symbol display controlled by the sub control unit are provided in the vicinity, and the consistency of the display contents of both can be confirmed and the display control is performed. It is possible to easily confirm that there is no problem with.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, the display control of both the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is performed by the main control unit. I decided to do it. In this mode, the first normal symbol display (normal symbol display 42) is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49) is sub-controlled. The display may be controlled by another control unit such as a unit. As a result, the same effect as that of the special symbol display described above is obtained.

Further, in addition to the second special symbol display and the second ordinary symbol display, a second first special symbol hold indicator, a second second special symbol hold indicator, and a second normal figure (not shown) are shown. A hold indicator may be provided. At this time, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b) and the second normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42) are mainly controlled. The display is controlled by the unit, and the second special figure hold indicator (first special figure hold indicator, second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are controlled by other control units such as the sub-control unit. It may be controlled by. In addition, these, the first special figure hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), the first normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), the first The special figure holding indicator (2nd 1st special figure holding indicator, 2nd special figure holding indicator) and 2nd normal drawing holding indicator may be provided on the same main indicator 40. it can. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of the two, easily confirm the consistency of the displayed contents, and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control.

In addition, the first special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), the first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), and the first special symbol hold indicator (1st special figure hold indicator 43a, 2nd special figure hold indicator 43b), 1st normal figure hold indicator (normal figure hold indicator 42), 2nd special symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49) C1 and c2), the second ordinary symbol indicator (variable state indicator 49 c3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure) The hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator may all be provided on the same main indicator 40. As a result, it is possible to improve the listability of these display units and easily confirm whether or not there is a problem in the display control by the main control unit and the display control by the sub control. Further, the main display 40 can be provided on the outside (outside) of the game area 3. Further, it can be provided on the game board 2 on the outside (outside) of the game area 3.

In addition, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), the display is controlled by the main control unit when the power is supplied again. Special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), first special symbol hold indicator (first special symbol) The figure hold indicator 43a, the second special figure hold indicator 43b), and the first normal figure hold indicator (general figure hold indicator 42) first execute display (display control) (restart and return). , The second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and the second special figure whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), and the second normal figure hold indicator later execute (restart, return) display (display control). ..

However, the second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), the second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and the second feature whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. The figure hold indicator (the second first special figure hold indicator, the second second special figure hold indicator) and the second normal figure hold indicator are image display devices whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. The display (display control) is executed (restarted and restored) before (the first image display device 7, the second image display device 71, and / and the third image display device 72). This is a simple display control in which the main display lights, turns off, and blinks a single LED, respectively, while the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or /, and so on. This is because the 3 image display device 72) is composed of a liquid crystal display unit and has more complicated display control than the main display device.

As a result, even if the display unit shows the special symbol hit / miss judgment result or the fluctuation state controlled by the same sub-control unit, the first sub-display unit that quickly returns the display after the power is turned on again (after the power is restored) And a second sub-display unit that returns the display with a delay after that. Then, depending on each role, it becomes possible to execute the optimum game control. The first sub-display unit includes a second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49) and a second normal symbol display (variable state display 49) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit. C3), the second special figure hold indicator (second first special figure hold indicator, second second special figure hold indicator), and the second normal figure hold indicator are applicable and simple. With the display control, it is possible to easily grasp the fluctuation state and the like, and it is possible to quickly recover after the power is turned on again. Further, the second sub-display unit corresponds to an image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or /, and third image display device 72) whose display is also controlled by the sub-control unit. However, with complicated display control, various game information and game effects (reach effect, notice effect, story effect, etc.) can be displayed, and it is possible to improve the taste by various game effects.

Further, in still another aspect, if the power is cut off (power cut) for some reason during the game or the game machine is operating (power is on), the sub-control unit will supply power again. A second special symbol display (c1 and c2 of the variable state display 49), a second normal symbol display (c3 of the variable state display 49), and a second special symbol hold display (second) whose display is controlled. 2 1st special figure holding display, 2nd 2nd special figure holding display), 2nd normal figure holding display first executes (restarts, returns) display (display control), and the main control unit First special symbol display (first special symbol display 41a and second special symbol display 41b), first ordinary symbol display (ordinary symbol display 42), first special symbol whose display is controlled by The hold display (first special figure hold display 43a, second special figure hold display 43b) and the first normal figure hold display (normal figure hold display 42) later execute (restart) display (display control). , And the image display device (first image display device 7, second image display device 71, or / and third image display device 72) whose display is controlled by the sub-control unit is further displayed (display control). ) May be executed (restart, return).

Next, Example 2 of the present invention will be described. The second embodiment shows one embodiment of the effect that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment and the configuration related to the effect control. In the following, the characteristic configuration of the second embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the configuration common to the first embodiment will be omitted. Further, in the following, different codes and step numbers from those of the first embodiment will be used for configurations different from those of the first embodiment, and the same codes and step numbers and the like will be used for common configurations.

The various effects described in the second embodiment are the control processes (received command analysis process (S4302), variable effects) performed by the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) as described in the first embodiment. It is realized by the start process (S4404), the winning game effect process (S4408), etc.). Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) is also referred to as an “effect execution means” or a “effect control means”. Further, in the second embodiment, the high base state (low probability high base state and high probability high base state, that is, state B) in the above-mentioned Example 1 is also referred to as a "first game state" and has a low probability. The high base state (state B) is also called "low probability and first game state", and the high probability high base state (state B) is also called "high probability and first game state", and the high probability low base The state (state C) is also referred to as a "second game state" or a "small hit frequent occurrence state". These things are the same for Example 3 and Example 4 described later.

[RTC function]
As shown in FIG. 53, a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) 92 is mounted on the sub-control board 90 included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. The block diagram of the sub-control board 90 shown in FIG. 53 replaces the sub-control board 90 of the first embodiment shown in FIG.

The RTC 92 corresponds to a timekeeping means capable of measuring the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 92 operates by the electric power when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with electric power from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and when the electric power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the power supply board 109 It operates by the electric power (backup power supply) supplied from the backup power supply circuit (not shown) provided in. Therefore, the RTC 92 can measure and output the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not turned on (when the power supply is stopped). Further, even if the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are erased (so-called ram clear), the RTC 92 can measure and output the current date and time without being affected by the erasure. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 92 may be provided on the sub-control board 90. As the backup power supply circuit, for example, a circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (button battery or the like) can be adopted.

As shown in FIG. 54, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the special effect-related process (S4301) by the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010). The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 54 replaces the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 50. In the second embodiment, the special effect-related process (S4301) makes it possible to execute a special effect based on the result of time counting by the RTC 92 (RTC function). Hereinafter, the special production-related processing (S4301) will be described.

[Special production related processing]
As shown in FIG. 58, in the special effect related process (S4301), first, it is determined whether or not the special effect execution flag is OFF (S5001). The special effect execution flag is a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being executed, in other words, a flag indicating whether or not the special effect is being executed. When the special effect is not executed (when the special effect period is not in progress), the special effect execution flag is turned off, and when the special effect is being executed (when the special effect period is in progress), the special effect execution flag is set. Is turned on. This special effect execution flag is turned on by the processing of S5003 described later when the special effect is started, and is turned off when the special effect execution time (effect time) elapses and the special effect (special effect period) ends. To.

If it is determined in S5001 that the special effect execution flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S5001), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S5002. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special effect execution flag is OFF (YES in S5001), it is determined whether or not the current time clocked by the RTC92 is the start time of the special effect (S5002). In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a special effect based on the result of time counting by the RTC 92 described above. That is, the special effect is executed based on the result of the timed by the RTC92 regardless of the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol (the special figure fluctuation pattern), and the time measured by the RTC92 is a preset time. It starts at (predetermined time). In the S5002, it is determined whether or not the current time is the time (start time) at which the special effect is to be started by referring to the timing status of the RTC92.

Here, in this embodiment, a predetermined time (start time), which is an execution condition (start condition) of the special effect, is set every hour between 10:00:00 and 22:00:00. ing. Therefore, the special effect is executed every hour (periodically) with 10:00:00 as the first time every day. The special effect that is periodically executed in this way is also called "RTC effect".

If the S5002 determines that the current time is the start time of the special effect (YES in S5002), turn on the special effect execution flag (S5003) and specify the start (execution) of the special effect. Is set in the sub output buffer (S5004). When this special effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-mentioned command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 outputs image data corresponding to the special effect pattern specified based on the special effect start command. It is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and a special effect or the like based on the read image data is executed on the display screen of the image display device. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 executes output control of sound effects (effect sounds) and lighting control of various lamps in accordance with the image display (display effect) related to the special effect. On the other hand, if the S5002 determines that the current time is not the start time of the special effect (NO in the S5002), the main processing is completed without performing the processing after the S5003.

In this embodiment, the special effect is set to be executed (started) every hour, but the interval (cycle) in which the special effect is executed can be arbitrarily set (selected) on the game hall side. You may do so. For example, a setting switch (not shown) is provided on the sub-control board 90, and the execution interval (cycle) is set to a predetermined time (for example, any of "1 hour", "2 hours", and "3 hours") by operating the switch. It can be configured to be configurable (cycle setting means). As a result, when a plurality of pachinko game machines 1 are installed in the game hall, the game hall can arbitrarily set an environment in which the special effects are simultaneously executed by the plurality of pachinko game machines 1. It becomes. It is possible to set such a cycle not only by operating the switch on the sub-control board 90 but also by operating the effect button provided on the front frame 51. In this case, a cycle setting screen that can be activated by a person other than the player, such as a clerk or manager of the game hall, by performing a predetermined input operation is displayed on the display screen 7a of the first image display device 7. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the cycle can be set by operating the effect buttons according to the screen. It is desirable that the player cannot set the execution cycle of such a special effect. This is to prevent the execution interval of the special effect from being changed without permission.

[Special production (RTC production)]
Next, the special effect (RTC effect) that can be executed by the above-mentioned special effect-related process (S4301) will be described. The special effect (RTC effect) of this embodiment mainly includes the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (also referred to as "sub liquid crystal") provided on the left and right sides of the front frame 51, and a game area. It is executed by using the first image display device 7 (also referred to as "main liquid crystal") provided in the substantially center of 3 and the speaker 67, and the main effect corresponding to the main effect part and the main effect thereof. It is composed of the preceding production that is performed prior to.

The ROM (image ROM) of the image control board 100 stores image data corresponding to the main effect (also referred to as "main effect image data") and image data corresponding to the preceding effect (also referred to as "preceding effect image data"). Has been done. Further, the ROM of the sub-control board 90 stores acoustic data corresponding to the main effect (also referred to as "main effect acoustic data") and acoustic data corresponding to the preceding effect (also referred to as "preceding effect acoustic data"). There is. When the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied based on the result of timing by RTC92, the data is read out, the effect image related to the preceding effect or the main effect is displayed on the image display device, and the preceding effect or the main effect is displayed. The sound effect (directing sound) related to is output from the speaker. As a result, a special effect is executed.

It should be noted that one or both of the main effect image data and the preceding effect image data are also referred to as "special effect image data", and one or both of the main effect sound data and the preceding effect sound data are referred to as "special effect". Also called "acoustic data". Further, the production image corresponding to the main production is also referred to as a "main production image", and the image corresponding to the preceding production is also referred to as a "preceding production image", and either or both of the main production image and the preceding production image. It is also called a "special production image". Further, the sound effect corresponding to the main production is also referred to as "main production sound", and the sound effect corresponding to the preceding production is also referred to as "preceding production sound", and either one of the main production sound and the preceding production sound or Both are also called "special sound effects".

Here, the special effect is produced based on the content according to the model equipped with the RTC function, and is suitable for being executed periodically regardless of the result of the special symbol winning / failing judgment. .. Examples of the subject (content) of the special production include manga, anime, movies, dramas, and musicians. In this embodiment, a plurality of special effects (special effect patterns) are provided, and each time a predetermined time is clocked by the RTC92 (every hour in this example), the plurality of special effects (special effect patterns) are provided. It is executed one by one from the inside. Specifically, in this embodiment, 20 types of special effect patterns 1 to 20 are provided, and the contents of the main effects are different from each other. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a model based on a predetermined serial drama and is a special production according to the subject, the main production of the special production (special production 1) based on the special production pattern 1 is the first. The content of the production is determined such that the main production of the special production (special production 2) based on the story and the special production pattern 2 is the second episode.

On the other hand, the contents of the preceding effects constituting the special effects are common to the special effects patterns 1 to 20 (special effects 1 to 20). The preceding effect of this embodiment is an effect (countdown effect) that counts down the remaining period until the main effect is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), a numerical image 200 (countdown image) composed of a single digit number representing the remaining time (seconds) until the start of the main effect is displayed on the display screen of the first symbol display device 7. The preceding effect (countdown effect) is executed by displaying the number in the substantially center of 7a and counting down the number one by one. In this embodiment, the countdown effect (preceding effect) is executed from about 5 seconds before the start of the main effect, and the numbers in the number image 200 are counted down one by one in order from "5". Then, when the number indicated by the number image 200 becomes "0" (zero), the countdown effect ends, and the main effect is started thereafter (see FIG. 56B).

In the main production, for example, in the case of a special production of a model based on a serial drama as described above, what story such as "Episode ○" is displayed on the second image display device 71 (display screen 71a) as a sub liquid crystal. An image (main production image) indicating whether it is an eye (number of stories) is displayed, and an image (starring) showing a title corresponding to the number of stories is also displayed on the third image display device 72 (display screen 72a) as a sub liquid crystal. The output image) is displayed, and the drama image (main production image) according to the story (synopsis) according to the number of stories (title) is displayed on the first image display device 7 (display screen 7a) as the main liquid crystal. (See FIG. 56 (b)). Further, while the main production is performed, background music (BGM) such as a drama theme song and an insert song is output from the speaker 67.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the time measured by the RTC 92 becomes a predetermined time and the special effect is executed, the countdown effect is first executed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (see FIG. 56 (a)). ), Following the end of the countdown effect, the main effect is executed on the display screens 71a and 72a of the left and right sub liquid crystals and the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (see FIG. 56B). The countdown effect, which is executed as the preceding effect and indicates the remaining period until the start of the main effect, does not have to be based on the numerical image 200 as in this embodiment. For example, the remaining period until the start of the main effect. It may be based on a timer image in which the number of seconds is displayed up to 1/100 second and the countdown is displayed. In addition to the countdown production, the preceding production can be, for example, a production that indicates the start of the main production by counting up numbers and time (count-up production), and introduces the contents of the main production that will be started from now on. Any mode can be used as long as it can be an effect (introduction effect) to be performed and the player can be made aware that the main effect will be started.

In this embodiment, the special effects (special effects 1 to 20) based on the above special effect patterns 1 to 20 are executed in order from the youngest pattern number every hour (predetermined cycle). That is, when the pachinko game machine 1 is operated (powered on) for the first time after being installed in the game hall and the first execution condition (time condition) is satisfied, the special effect 1 is executed, and thereafter, the special effect 2 is executed every hour. It is executed in the order of special production 3. Then, when the special effect 20 is executed, the process returns to the special effect 1 and then the special effects 1 to 20 are looped and executed. The production time (execution time) of the special production is determined according to the special production pattern, and in this embodiment, one production time is about 5 to 6 minutes. Therefore, an execution period of about 5 to 6 minutes (also referred to as a "special effect period") of the special effect is generated every hour (predetermined cycle). As a result, it is possible to attract the interest of the player in the game hall and the player who is playing the game machine 1.

In addition, in the normal production state in which the special production is not executed, that is, outside the execution period of the special production (also referred to as "normal production period"), information on the special production (main production) executed in the next cycle is available. It is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal (not shown). In this case, the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal functions as an information display unit for displaying information regarding the next special effect (main effect). In this embodiment, as information about the special effect (main effect), the remaining time until the time measured by the RTC92 becomes the next start time, that is, the remaining time until the next special effect is executed (started). The time and the content of the next special production (main production) are displayed. The remaining time can be a timer display that counts down the time in a display format of, for example, "○ hours ○○ minutes ○○ seconds" (○ is a value of any of "0" to "9"). In addition, the content of the next special production (main production) can be the number of episodes and the title display of the next special production (main production), for example, "Episode ○: □□□□".

In this embodiment, the countdown effect is executed when the information about the next special effect (in this example, the remaining time and the content of the main effect) is set to the predetermined time (start time) by the RTC92. Is displayed until is completed. At this time, the countdown of the number image 200 displayed in the countdown effect (“5” → “4” → “3” → “2” → “1” → “0”) and the display on the right sub liquid crystal display screen 72a. The display is controlled so that the countdown of the remaining time (“0 hours 00 minutes 05 seconds” to “0 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds”) is performed in accordance with the countdown. As a result, the countdown effect (countdown display of the number image 200) executed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) and the countdown display of the remaining time displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) can be linked. , It is possible to start the special production (main production) without giving the player a sense of discomfort due to the deviation (mismatch) of the countdown display (remaining time).

As described above, the execution interval (cycle) of the special effect can be arbitrarily set (selected) to any (predetermined time) of, for example, "1 hour", "2 hours", and "3 hours" on the game hall side. In this case, the special effect (RTC effect) is executed (started) according to the set execution interval (cycle). In addition, a special effect period will occur according to the set execution interval (cycle). Further, information (remaining time, etc.) regarding the special effect (main effect) executed in the next cycle according to the set execution interval (cycle) is displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, information on the execution status of the special effect such as the latest special effect executed by the effect control microcomputer 91 based on the measurement result by the RTC 92 and the content (type) of the special effect to be executed next is substituting. It is stored in the RAM of the control board 90, and the information is to be backed up (backup data) when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. For this reason, for example, when the business of one day ends and the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off while the special effects 1 to 10 are executed, the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned on (starts operation) on the next business day. When the first execution condition (time condition) is satisfied, the special effect 11 is executed. As a result, it is possible to maintain the execution order of the special effects, and it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the execution order is out of order due to the game machine (installation table) installed in the game hall.

Further, the special effect does not have to be composed of the preceding effect and the main effect, and may be composed of only the main effect, for example. In addition, the configuration of the special effect is arbitrary, such as providing a plurality of preceding effects such as performing a further predetermined preceding effect before the preceding effect, providing a plurality of main effects, or performing a predetermined post-effect after the main effect. Is.

Here, as described in the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is various under the control of the sub control unit 90 (the effect control microcomputer 91) based on various commands transmitted from the main control unit 80. The production (game production) is executed. The effect is mainly executed in a mode according to the state of the game machine (game state). The game state is controlled by the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) (state control means), and can be roughly classified into a customer waiting state in which a game such as a variable display of identification information or a hit game is not performed. It is composed of a (standby state), a variable game state in which a variable display of identification information is performed, and a hit game state in which a hit game is performed. Further, the variable gaming state includes the above-mentioned state A (low accuracy low base state), state B (low accuracy high base state, high accuracy high base state) and state C (high accuracy low base state). Of these gaming states, the state A is the basic gaming state (normal gaming state), and if a jackpot is won in this state A, the jackpot game can be executed. Then, depending on the type (type) of the jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a state B or a state C that is more advantageous to the player than the state A. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be controlled for each of these gaming states, the execution mode of the special effect executed based on the result of timekeeping by the RTC 92 differs depending on the gaming state.

That is, as described above, the special effect is composed of a preceding effect (countdown effect) and a main effect, and when the time measured by the RTC92 becomes a predetermined time and the execution condition (start condition) of the special effect is satisfied, FIG. 56 As shown in, first, a countdown effect is executed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) (FIG. 56 (a)), and then the left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a and 72a) and the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) are starring. The output is executed (Fig. 56 (b)). In this way, the special effects (preceding effect and main effect) are executed using the entire display screens of the main liquid crystal and the sub liquid crystal when the execution conditions are satisfied (the time measured by the RTC92 is a predetermined time). This is when the gaming state of (when it becomes) is controlled to the above-mentioned customer waiting state or state A.

On the other hand, when the game state when the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied is controlled to the above-mentioned jackpot game state, state B or state C, that is, it is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state. When controlled to the gaming state (also referred to as "special gaming state"), the special effect is not executed on the main liquid crystal but is executed only on the sub liquid crystal. That is, the effect image (special effect image) related to the preceding effect and the main effect is not displayed on the main liquid crystal, and the special effect image is displayed only on the sub liquid crystal. This is because, in the special game state, the effect image (effect pattern, background image, etc.) corresponding to the special game state is displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a). For example, in the big hit game state, a round effect image is displayed, in state B, an effect image dedicated to the high base state (effect pattern, effect hold, background image, etc.) is displayed, and in state C, it is dedicated including during the small hit game. The effect image (effect pattern, effect hold, background image, etc.) is displayed. In this way, in the special game state, a special effect is executed according to the special game state. Therefore, if the special effect is executed in a large scale under such a situation, the effect becomes too lively and the game is rather lively. There is a risk of diminishing interest. Further, since the big hit game state, the state B, and the state C do not occur unless the conditions (predetermined game conditions) such as winning the big hit are satisfied, it is possible to experience the dedicated effect executed in these game states. Opportunities are less likely to be obtained than special productions that are performed periodically (regularly). In view of this, when the game state when the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied is controlled to the customer waiting state or the state A (when it is not the special game state), as shown in FIG. 56, the main liquid crystal is displayed. When the special effect image is displayed and the special effect is executed and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, state B or state C (when the special game state is reached), as shown in FIG. 57 (a). , The special effect image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal to execute the special effect. As a result, it is possible to appropriately display the special effect image related to the special effect according to the game state, and even when the special effect is executed in the special game state, the effect according to the special game state. It is possible to display a special effect image without disturbing the visibility of the image.

Specifically, when the special effect is executed while being controlled to the special game state (big hit game state, state B or state C), that is, when the special effect image is displayed on the sub liquid crystal, FIG. 56 (a). The special effect image (preceding effect image, main effect image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal shown in (b) is reduced and displayed on the display screen of the sub liquid crystal. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 57A, two sub liquid crystals on the left and right are provided, and a reduced special effect image is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal. Therefore, if the execution condition of the special effect is satisfied while the jackpot game state, state B, or state C is controlled, the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (and the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal) is displayed in the game state at that time. A countdown image is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal in a state where the corresponding effect image is displayed, and subsequently, the main effect image is displayed. At this time, the main effect image displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is the main effect image displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) when the special effect is executed in the customer waiting state or the state A. It is a reduced version. Therefore, for example, when the special production is based on a serial drama as described above, the drama image is displayed smaller than the case where the drama image is displayed on the main liquid crystal. Further, in the present embodiment, when the special effect is executed in the customer waiting state or the state A, the "image showing the number of talks" displayed on the left sub liquid crystal (display screen 71a) and the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is displayed. And "an image showing the title" (see FIG. 56 (b)) are also displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (see FIG. 57 (a)).

Further, when the special effect image is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) in the special game state, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the display unit S (reduced display unit) for reducing and displaying the special effect image. Is provided on a part of the display screen 72a, and the main effect image can be reducedly displayed on the display unit S. That is, the special effect image can be displayed like a so-called "wipe screen". In the special game state, not only the main liquid crystal but also the sub liquid crystal may display the effect image according to the special game state, so as not to interfere with the display of the effect image.

In the special game state, the special effect image is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) in the jackpot game state, and the states B and C are both right-handed states in which the game is played by right-handed. This is because the person's consciousness tends to turn to the right side of the center of the game board. Further, a display unit S (reduced display unit) for reducing and displaying the special effect image may be provided on, for example, a part of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (for example, the lower right).

[Notice production]
Next, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the notice effects related to the display result of the variable display of the identification information (special symbol and / or effect symbol), the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice are given. It has a production. The first notice effect suggests the possibility (big hit reliability) that the display result of the variable display currently being executed becomes a big hit mode (specific display result) (big hit reliability), and the second notice effect is currently It suggests that the jackpot reliability of the variable display during execution is high (high expectation effect), and in the third notice effect, the display result of the variable display currently being executed becomes the jackpot mode (specific display result). It is something that suggests that (specific suggestion production). The first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect are all advance notice effects related to the currently executing fluctuation display (also referred to as "the change"), and the notice effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4506. It is a kind of "the change notice" that can be executed based on. The first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect can all be included in the variable effect pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505.

In this embodiment, of the first notice effect, the second notice effect, and the third notice effect, the first notice effect can be executed when the game state is controlled to the state A (low probability low base state). Yes, it is not executed when it is controlled to state B (high base state) and when it is controlled to state C (high accuracy low base state). On the other hand, the second notice effect and the third notice effect can be executed in all the gaming states of state A (low accuracy low base state), state B (high base state) and state C (high accuracy low base state). .. That is, the first notice effect may be executed in the effect mode A or B, and may not be executed in the other effect modes. On the other hand, the second notice effect and the third notice effect may be executed in any of the effect modes A to E.

The first notice effect is executed by displaying a suggestion image suggesting high or low jackpot reliability on a predetermined display screen, and the display mode (display content) of the suggestion image is one step according to a predetermined order. It is something that can change step by step from to multiple stages (also called "stage production"). In this embodiment, the display mode of the suggestion image can be changed up to the third stage. At the beginning of the first notice effect, the suggestion image is displayed in the display mode of the first stage, and the jackpot reliability is designed to increase as the display mode of the suggestion image changes stepwise and the stage goes up. ing. From this, the first notice production includes a low reliability pattern that ends in the first stage, a medium reliability pattern that progresses to the second stage and ends, and a high reliability pattern that advances to the third stage and ends. Any of these patterns is set in the above-mentioned S4506 when the first notice effect is executed. The staged effect as the first notice effect may be one that can change up to two stages or one that can change by four or more stages, and the number of stages is appropriately determined according to the effect time (effect time) of the variable effect. Can be done.

Further, the first notice effect is executed outside the execution period of the above-mentioned special effect (RTC effect) (when the special effect period does not occur) and during the execution period of the special effect (special effect period occurs). The execution mode (display mode) is different from the case where the execution mode (display mode) is executed. That is, when the first notice effect is executed outside the execution period of the special effect, the first notice effect is one main liquid crystal from two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72). The first suggestion image that can be displayed on the (first image display device 7) is displayed and executed, and the display mode of the first suggestion image can be changed from the first stage to the third stage. It has become. On the other hand, when the first notice effect is executed during the execution period of the special effect, the first notice effect is one sub liquid crystal (second image display device 71 or third image display device 72) and the main liquid crystal, respectively. The display mode of the two second suggestion images can be changed from the first stage to the third stage.

Therefore, when the first notice effect is executed, the pattern of the first notice effect (also referred to as "first notice effect pattern") according to whether or not the special effect is executed (execution status) at that time is S4506 described above. It is set in. That is, in the above-mentioned low reliability pattern, medium reliability pattern, and high reliability pattern, one corresponding to the outside of the execution period of the special effect and the other corresponding to the execution period of the special effect are provided in advance. Therefore, any of these patterns is set according to the situation when the first notice effect is executed. The first notice effect executed outside the execution period of the special effect is also referred to as "normal first notice effect", and the first notice effect executed during the execution period of the special effect is "special first notice effect". Also called "notice production".

Here, FIG. 60 shows an example of a table (first notice effect determination table) to be referred to when determining the first advance notice effect pattern set in S4506. As shown in the figure, the first notice effect determination table sets the first notice effect pattern to "first stage (low reliability)" and "1st stage (low reliability)" according to the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol accompanying the execution of the first notice effect. It has a data structure that can be determined as either "1st → 2nd stage (medium reliability)" or "1st → 2nd → 3rd stage (high reliability)". Specifically, a random number value for determining the advance notice effect is assigned according to the determination type of the first advance notice effect pattern for each variation pattern of the special symbol accompanied by the execution of the first advance notice effect. In this embodiment, since the random number range of the random number for determining the advance notice effect is "0 to 99", the random number value (determination data) is assigned within the range of "0 to 99".

FIG. 60A is a table to be referred to when the first notice effect is executed by the jackpot fluctuation when the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination is a jackpot. Further, FIG. 60B is a table to be referred to when the first notice effect is executed due to the deviation fluctuation when the result of the first special symbol hit / miss determination is deviation. It should be noted that the first notice effect pattern is determined according to the result of the first special symbol hit / fail determination in the state A (low probability low base state) in which the first notice effect can be executed, and the state A is the first. 1 This is because it is a game state in which the variable display of the special symbol is mainly performed. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the second special symbol hit / fail determination is executed in the state A, the first notice effect is not executed based on the determination result (executable).

As shown in FIG. 60A, when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is a big hit and the first notice effect is executed with the big hit fluctuation, the low reliability that the first notice effect ends in the first stage. The pattern is not selected, and a medium reliability pattern that advances to two stages and ends or a high reliability pattern that advances to three stages and ends is selected. Then, the possibility (selection rate) that the high reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps → 3 steps) is selected is higher than the medium reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps). Further, when the first notice effect is executed by the jackpot fluctuation, the medium reliability pattern or the high reliability pattern is selected when the fluctuation pattern is "P1". This is a relatively long fluctuation time of 120 seconds for the fluctuation pattern “P1” (see FIG. 9), and is a time for changing the display mode of the suggestion image (first suggestion image or second suggestion image) by two or more steps. This is because the display mode of the first suggestion image can be safely changed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), when the result of the first special symbol winning / failing determination is out of order and the first notice effect is executed with the out-of-order variation, the low reliability pattern (1st step) is selected most. It is easy, and the selection rate decreases (difficult to select) in the order of medium reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage) and high reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage). Further, when the first notice effect is executed due to the deviation variation, when the variation pattern is "P6" or "P10", the medium reliability pattern and the high reliability pattern are not selected, and only the low reliability pattern is selected. When it is "P5" or "P9", the high reliability pattern is not selected and the low reliability pattern or the medium reliability pattern is selected, and "P4" or "P8". , A low reliability pattern, a medium reliability pattern, or a high reliability pattern is selected. This is because in the case of the fluctuation patterns "P6" and "P10", the fluctuation time is 30 seconds (see FIG. 9), so that the medium reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps) and the high reliability pattern are within that time. It is difficult to perform the first notice effect by (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage), and in the case of the fluctuation patterns “P5” and “P9”, the fluctuation time is 45 seconds (see FIG. 9), so that time. This is because it is difficult to perform the first notice production with a high reliability pattern (1st stage → 2nd stage → 3rd stage). Further, in the case of the fluctuation patterns "P4" and "P8", since the fluctuation time is 120 seconds like the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern "P1" (see FIG. 9), the low reliability pattern (1 step) and the medium reliability This is because it is possible to safely change the display mode of the suggestion image for any of the degree pattern (1 step → 2 steps) and the high reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps → 3 steps).

In the case of deviation fluctuation, the first advance notice effect can be executed when the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, and the fluctuation patterns "P7" (variation time 12 seconds) and "Floating time 12 seconds" in which the fluctuation time is less than 30 seconds. For "P11" (variation time 4 seconds), the first notice effect is not executed. This is because it is not possible to secure a sufficient execution time of the first notice effect.

In this embodiment, the first notice effect (normal first notice effect) is executed outside the special effect execution period (normal effect period), and the first notice effect is performed within the special effect execution period (special effect period). The same first notice effect determination table is used in the case of executing the notice effect (special first notice effect). Then, the image data for the first notice effect according to whether or not the special effect is executed (normal effect period or special effect period) when the first notice effect is executed is read out, and the first notice effect (normally) based on the image data. The first notice production or the special first notice production) is to be executed. However, the first notice production determination table may be different between the normal production period and the special production period. That is, a first notice effect determination table for the normal effect period and a first advance notice effect determination table for the special effect period are provided, and whether or not the special effect is executed when the first notice effect is executed (normal effect period or special). A table to be referred to may be set according to the effect period). When the tables are provided separately in this way, the appearance rate (appearance mode) of the first notice effect pattern can be made different between the normal effect period and the special effect period, and the appearance mode of the first notice effect is changed. It becomes possible to make it.

Here, the execution mode (effect mode) of the normal first notice effect and the special first notice effect will be described. First, usually, as shown in FIG. 58, the first notice effect is executed by displaying an effect image 300 (also referred to as “shooting star image 300”) imitating a shooting star as a first suggestion image. As described above, the execution mode of the first notice effect (first notice effect pattern) includes a low reliability pattern in which the first notice effect ends in the first stage and a medium reliability pattern in which the first notice effect ends in two stages. There are three patterns, one is a high reliability pattern and the other is a high reliability pattern that progresses to three stages and ends. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) includes a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first display mode) and a display mode corresponding to the second stage (second display). Aspect) and a display mode corresponding to the third stage (third aspect) are provided. In FIG. 58, the upper stage is the first stage, the middle stage is the second stage, and the lower stage is the third stage.

Normally, in the first notice effect, the sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) on the left and right sides outside the game area to the main liquid crystal (first image display device) located substantially in the center of the board in the game area. An effect display showing how the shooting star is flying toward 7) is performed using the shooting star image 300. That is, in the first stage (first display mode) of the first notice effect, the shooting star image 300 is normally displayed on substantially the entire left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a, 72a) as shown in the upper part of FIG. 58. The shooting star image 300 is not displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a).

Normally, in the second stage (second display mode) of the first notice effect, as shown in the middle stage of FIG. 58, the shooting star image 300 depicting more shooting stars than the first stage is displayed on the left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a, 72a). ) Is displayed almost entirely, and the shooting star image 300 is displayed in a mode of moving (flowing) to both the left and right sides on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal.

Normally, in the third stage (third display mode) of the first notice effect, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 58, the shooting star image 300 depicting more shooting stars than in the second stage is displayed on the left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a, 72a). ), And the shooting star image 300 is displayed in a manner of flying (flowing) over substantially the entire display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal.

As described above, the display location (display position) of the shooting star image 300 normally related to the first notice effect is substantially the entire display screens 71a and 72a of the left and right sub liquid crystals and a part of the display screen 7a of the central main liquid crystal ( It is provided on both the left and right sides) or almost the entire surface. The display location (display position) of the shooting star image 300 is also referred to as a "first display unit".

In this embodiment, when the normal first notice effect is performed in two or more stages, that is, when the normal first notice effect is performed by the medium reliability pattern or the high reliability pattern, the normal first notice effect is the so-called "pseudo". It is executed along with the fluctuation effect by "Ren". Pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream effect) is to temporarily stop (temporarily stop) in a stop display mode (predetermined random number) other than doublet after the effect symbol 8 is variablely displayed during one variable display of the special symbol. After that, the operation of displaying the effect symbol 8 in a variable manner is repeated a predetermined number of times. The shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) of each stage is displayed from the start of each variation display constituting the pseudo-ream until the first stop symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped).

Specifically, for example, as a variation effect based on the effect pattern of the pseudo-ream, after the start of the variation display of the effect symbol 8, the first (first) temporary stop is performed, and then the second variation display (pseudo). In the case where the second temporary stop is performed after 2) is performed, and then the third fluctuation display (pseudo 3) is performed, and the fluctuation effect is usually accompanied by a high reliability pattern. When the first notice effect is performed, the shooting star image 300 is displayed in the first stage display mode from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol 8 to the first (first) temporary stop (upper part of FIG. 58), and is simulated. The shooting star image 300 is displayed in the second stage display mode from the start of 2 to the second provisional stop (middle of FIG. 58), and a predetermined time from the start of pseudo 3 to the predetermined stop before the fixed stop (for example, when reach is established or predetermined). The shooting star image 300 is displayed in the third stage display mode (lower part of FIG. 58) until the execution time of the effect). As described above, in this embodiment, when the first notice effect is normally performed in two or more stages, the normal first notice effect is executed along with the variation effect of the pseudo-ream, and the first notice effect is usually executed according to the progress of the pseudo-ream. Normally, the stage of the first notice production is going up. By combining such a pseudo-ream and the normal first notice effect, it is possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and improve the game entertainment.

It should be noted that the normal first notice effect based on the low reliability pattern (finished in the first stage) is executed according to the variation effect of the pseudo-ream and the variation effect that is not the pseudo-ream (non-pseudo-ream effect). There may be one or both of the cases where it is done. Further, in this embodiment, it is assumed that two or more stages of the normal first notice effect are executed along with the variation effect of the pseudo-ream, but the normal first notice effect of two or more stages is executed along with the variation effect that is not the pseudo-ream. May be executed. In this case, for example, between the start of fluctuation of the effect symbol and the stop (temporary stop) of the first stop symbol, a plurality of effects from the first stage effect to the plurality of stage effects are performed according to a predetermined order. As a "step-up notice effect" to be executed step by step, usually the first notice effect can be executed. In addition to the mode in which the display mode of the shooting star image 300 is changed stepwise, the execution mode (effect mode) of the first notice effect is usually from the sub liquid crystal to the main liquid crystal as the first suggestion image ( A background image that can be displayed (across) is provided, and the stage (progress) of the first notice effect is usually indicated by the color change of the background image (for example, blue → green → red), or the background image can be further moved and displayed. It is possible to take a mode in which the stage (progress) of the first notice effect is usually indicated by the amount of movement (the ratio occupying the display screen of the main liquid crystal). Alternatively, usually, a character or item corresponding to the stage of the first notice effect may be determined in advance, and a specific image (specific image) showing the character or item may be displayed on the image display device as the first suggestion image. Good.

When the first notice effect is usually performed up to the third stage as described above, that is, when the display mode of the first suggested image is changed to the third display mode, the third stage is reached (to the third display mode). The second notice effect (high expectation effect) is executed at the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the change). The second notice effect of the present embodiment is mainly composed of a movable effect for operating the movable decorative member 14, and a predetermined sound effect is generated or lamps emit light in association with the movable effect. In the second notice effect (movable effect), the movable decorative member 14 falls from the standby position and appears on the front side (display surface side) of the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), and the state is kept for several seconds (for example, 3 seconds). After holding it, it is performed in a mode of returning (returning) to the standby position.

In addition to the movable effect, the second notice effect mainly comprises a display effect for displaying a predetermined notice image on the display screen of the image display device, or generates a predetermined sound effect (output from the speaker). It is possible to mainly configure a sound effect, or a light effect that causes an electric decoration member such as a board lamp or a frame lamp to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and two or more of them are combined and configured. You can also do it.

In addition to the case where the second notice effect is usually performed after the execution of the first notice effect, the second notice effect is performed after the execution of the special first notice effect as described later, and is related to the execution of the first notice effect. It may be performed independently at a predetermined time during the variable production (for example, when the production is developed). Therefore, in the second notice effect, the first notice effect (usually the first notice effect or the special first notice effect) may or may not be executed prior to its execution. Therefore, when the first notice effect is executed, the player can have an expectation for the subsequent execution (occurrence) of the second notice effect, and thereby the first notice effect (suggestion effect). It becomes possible to raise the player's interest in.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notice effect is usually performed up to the third stage, and the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) becomes the third display mode at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed. , The second notice production (high expectation production) is executed. A plurality of types of times are set in advance as predetermined times for determining the execution timing of the second notice effect, and when a high expectation pattern is normally selected as the pattern of the first notice effect, the second notice effect is executed. Any one of a plurality of types of time is also selected as the predetermined time up to. As the predetermined time, three types of "10 seconds", "25 seconds", and "40 seconds" are provided in this embodiment, and any one of them is selected. When the fluctuation effect that accompanies the execution of the normal first notice effect of the high expectation pattern is a big hit variation, a relatively long time is more likely to be selected as a predetermined time until the execution of the second notice effect than a short time. On the contrary, in the case of deviation fluctuation, a relatively short time is more likely to be selected than a long time. As a result, the time (predetermined) from when the first notice effect is usually performed up to the third stage (after the display mode of the first suggestion image becomes the third display mode) until the second notice effect is executed. The longer the time), the higher the reliability of the jackpot.

Normally, when the first notice effect is performed up to the third stage (when the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to the third display mode), during that period until the second notice effect is executed (occurs). An image showing the passage of time is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. In this embodiment, as an image showing the passage of time, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 58, a timer image 400 showing the remaining time until the second notice effect is executed (generated) in a countdown format is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is displayed in the upper center of. For this reason, when the variable effect is performed during the normal effect period, the player is first focused on whether or not the normal first notice effect (suggestion effect) is executed in the variable effect, and the normal first notice effect is performed. When executed, the player is made to pay attention to the display mode of the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) in the normal first notice effect, and when the display mode of the shooting star image 300 becomes the third display mode, there. It is possible to draw the player's attention to the timer image 400 showing the remaining time until the second notice effect (high expectation effect) is executed. This makes it possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player who expects the execution (occurrence) of the second notice effect (high expectation effect), which suggests that the jackpot reliability is relatively high. It is possible to improve the game entertainment when the production period does not occur (during the normal production period).

The timer image 400 may show the passage of time until the second advance notice effect is executed (generated) in a count-up format. In this case, under the specification (playability) that the longer the time (predetermined time) required for the second advance notice effect to be executed, the higher the jackpot reliability becomes, how much the time indicated by the timer image 400 advances (playability). It is possible to draw the player's attention to the crab (extend) and effectively raise the player's expectation. In addition, the time from when the first notice effect is usually performed up to the third stage (after the display mode of the first suggestion image is changed to the third display mode) until the second notice effect is executed (occurs). The image showing the progress does not have to be a timer image as in this embodiment, and if the player can recognize the time required to execute the second notice effect, for example, the time passage is displayed in a meter format. Various images such as an image shown and an image shown in an hourglass format can be adopted.

Next, the special first notice production will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, the special first notice effect displays a character image 500 composed of the characters "preparing" and a horizontally long bar-shaped gauge image 600 showing the progress of the special first notice effect as a second suggestion image. It is executed by doing. The character image 500 is displayed at the lower left on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal (image display device 7), and the gauge image 600 is displayed at the lower left of the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal (second image display device 71). In each case, the display is performed so as not to impair the visibility of the special effect image related to the special effect being executed on each display screen and the effect of the effect. Further, during the execution of the special first notice effect, the display positions of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 do not change (fixed) until the effect is completed. This is also to prevent the visibility and effect of the special effect (special effect image) from being impaired.

As described above, the first notice effect pattern includes three patterns: a low reliability pattern (1 step), a medium reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps), and a high reliability pattern (1 step → 2 steps → 3 steps). Since it is provided (see FIG. 60), the display mode of the second suggestion image including the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 also includes a display mode corresponding to the first stage (first display mode) and a second stage. A display mode (second display mode) corresponding to the above and a display mode (third display mode) corresponding to the third stage are provided. In FIG. 59, the upper stage is the first stage, the middle stage is the second stage, and the lower stage is the third stage. In addition, when the normal first notice effect is performed in two or more stages, the normal first notice effect is executed along with the variable effect of the pseudo-ream, but the special first notice effect is the pseudo-ream. It is executed with a non-variable effect (non-pseudo continuous effect). During the special effect period, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 59, the effect symbol 8 is displayed small at the lower right of the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, and the special effect mainly displaying the special effect image is executed. Therefore, the pseudo-ream by the effect symbol 8 has a poor effect, and the pseudo-ream (pseudo-ream effect) is not performed.

In the special first notice effect, the display modes of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 gradually change as the execution time of the effect elapses. That is, when the special first notice effect is started, at the time of the start, each of the characters "quasi", "equipment", and "medium" constituting the character image 500 is displayed in colorless and translucent, and the gauge image 600 is displayed. It is displayed with the gauge amount being zero. Then, as the special first notice production progresses (time elapses), the characters "quasi" among "quasi", "bitchū", and "medium" gradually change from colorless and translucent to colored opaque, and the characters gradually change to colored opacity. When is completely colored and opaque and can be clearly seen, the first stage of the special first notice production is completed. At this time, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 59, the "quasi" character of the "preparing" character image 500 is displayed as colored opaque (for example, opaque red), and the remaining "equipment" and "middle". The characters are still displayed colorless and translucent, and the gauge image 600 is displayed in a state where the gauge amount is advanced to about 1/3 (first display mode). In FIG. 59, the colorless and translucent characters among the characters "in preparation" are shown in white. When the special first notice effect is executed in a low reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the first stage display mode (first display mode) shown in the upper part of FIG. 59, thereafter. The display mode does not change, and then the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are erased from the screen, and the special first notice effect ends in the first stage. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 ends at substantially the same timing as or after the end of the special first notice effect.

When the special first notice effect advances to the second stage, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 59, the characters "quasi" and "equipment" in the character image 500 of "preparing" are colored and opaque (for example, opaque). It is displayed in red), the remaining "middle" characters are still displayed in colorless and translucent, and the gauge amount of the gauge image 600 is displayed in a state of being advanced to about 2/3 (second display mode). When the special first notice effect is executed in the medium reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the second stage display mode (second display mode) shown in the middle of FIG. 59, thereafter. The display mode does not change, and then the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 are erased from the screen, and the special first notice effect ends in the second stage. The variable display of the effect symbol 8 ends at substantially the same timing as or after the end of the special first notice effect.

Furthermore, when the special first notice production progresses to the third stage, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 59, all the characters of "quasi", "equipment", and "medium" in the character image 500 of "preparing" are colored and opaque. It is displayed in (for example, opaque red), and the gauge amount of the gauge image 600 is displayed in a full state (third display mode). When the special first notice effect is executed in a high reliability pattern, when the display mode of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 becomes the third stage display mode (third display mode) shown in the lower part of FIG. 59, the special first notice effect is obtained. The first notice production is finished, and after that, the second notice production (high expectation production) is executed. This second notice effect is an effect of the same mode as the case where the above-mentioned normal first notice effect is executed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the third stage was performed. That is, it is a notice effect mainly composed of a movable effect for operating the movable decorative member 14. Further, when the second notice effect is executed after the above-mentioned normal first notice effect, the second notice effect is executed at the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the normal first notice effect is performed up to the third stage. However, the second notice effect, which is executed after the special first notice effect, is also performed after the special first notice effect is performed up to the third stage (the display mode of the second suggestion image is the third). It is executed at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed (after changing to the display mode). Therefore, the second advance notice effect (high expectation effect) executed when the first advance notice effect is performed up to the third stage has the same mode (effect) regardless of whether or not a special effect period has occurred. Content). As a result, it is possible to standardize the second notice effect (high expectation effect) executed after the first notice effect to make the effect easy for the player to understand.

As described above, the display locations (display positions) of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 related to the special first notice effect are a part (lower part) of the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal and the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal in the center. It is provided in a part of (lower left). The display location (display position) of the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 is also referred to as a "second display unit".

When the second notice effect is executed after the special first notice effect, the timer image indicating the remaining time until the execution (occurrence) of the second notice effect is the sub liquid crystal (second image display device 71, third). It is not displayed on either the display screen of the image display device 72) or the main liquid crystal (first image display device 7). During the special effect period when the special first notice effect is executed, the special effect (display of the special effect image) is performed using the sub liquid crystal and the main liquid crystal, and the visibility and effect of the special effect are performed. This is so as not to damage the. However, it is an image different from the timer image 400 (see FIG. 58) when the second notice effect is usually executed after the first notice effect, and is an image suggesting the execution (occurrence) timing of the second notice effect. May be displayed on either the left or right sub liquid crystal. Specifically, for example, a count image that is smaller than the timer image 400 and indicates the period until the second notice effect is executed by counting up or down a number is displayed, and the value indicated by the count image is displayed. When becomes a predetermined value, the second notice effect may be executed. In this case, the count image may be displayed in a category that does not impair the visibility and effect of the special effect.

When the second notice effect is executed after the special first notice effect, the timing when the special first notice effect is performed up to the third stage (the timing when the display mode of the second suggestion image becomes the third display mode). ), The second notice effect may be executed (generated). This is because it is not necessary to display an image (timer image 400 or the like) indicating the period until the second notice effect is executed, and it is not necessary to provide an image for that purpose.

Further, when the second notice effect is executed after the special first notice effect, that is, when the second notice effect is executed during the special effect period, the mode of the second notice effect is usually the first notice effect. It may be different from the case where the second notice effect is executed through the above, that is, the case where the second notice effect is executed during the normal effect period. For example, as the second notice effect during the special effect period, an image depicting the fall of the movable decorative member 14 (movable effect depiction image) and an image suggesting that the jackpot reliability is high (high expectation image). May be displayed small on a part of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal or the main liquid crystal on which the special effect image is displayed. In this case, for example, a reduced display unit such as the above-mentioned display unit S (see FIG. 57 (b)) is provided on a part of the display screen of the sub liquid crystal or the main liquid crystal on which the special effect image is displayed, and the reduced display unit is provided. It can be configured to display a movable effect depiction image, a high expectation image, or the like on the display unit. Alternatively, the second notice effect executed during the special effect period is not something that appeals to the player's vision (visual effect) such as a movable effect executed as the second notice effect during the normal effect period. , A special sound effect may be temporarily generated (output) to appeal to the player's hearing (auditory production). By adopting these configurations, it is possible to execute the second notice effect (high expectation effect) so as not to impair the visibility and effect of the special effect being executed as much as possible. In this way, by making the mode (production content) of the second notice production different between the normal production period and the special production period, the second notice is in a mode (production content) suitable for each of the normal production period and the special production period. It becomes possible to execute the production. This makes it possible to differentiate the second notice effect (high expectation effect) that is executed after the first notice effect is performed up to three stages, and the difference can attract the interest of the player. It will be possible.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the first notice effect can be executed in different modes between the normal effect period and the special effect period. For this reason, the mode (production content) of the first notice production may be different between the normal production period and the special production period, or the suggestion production may be executed in a mode (production content) suitable for each of the normal production period and the special production period. It becomes possible to do things such as. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of both the special effect (display of the special effect image) and the first notice effect, and improve the game entertainment.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when the first notice effect (normally the first notice effect) is executed during the normal effect period, the display mode of the first notice effect may change as the stage progresses. The first suggestion image) is executed by being partially or wholly displayed on the display screens 71a and 72a of the left and right sub liquid crystals and the display screen 7a of the central main liquid crystal. On the other hand, when the first notice effect (special first notice effect) is executed during the special effect period, the first notice effect is a character image 500 and a gauge image 600 (the first) whose display mode may change as the stage progresses. 2 Suggestion image) is executed by being partially displayed on the display screen 71a of the left sub liquid crystal and the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal in the center, and the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 in this case are usually the first notice. It is displayed smaller than the shooting star image 300 related to the effect, and the display range (display ratio) occupying the display screen is also small. Therefore, in the first notice effect executed during the normal effect period, the shooting star image 300 (first suggestion image) is displayed prominently, and the player pays attention to the display mode (that is, the normal first notice effect). On the other hand, in the first advance notice effect executed during the special effect period, the character image 500 and the gauge image 600 (second suggestion image) are displayed conservatively so as not to impair the effect (special effect) by the special effect image. At the same time, it is possible to suggest the jackpot reliability of the fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to execute a notice effect having a different impression between the normal effect period and the special effect period, and it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the difference and improve the game interest.

In this embodiment, the first notice effect is a stage effect in which the display mode (display content) of the suggested image can be changed stepwise from one stage to a plurality of stages according to a predetermined order. With the passage of time, the type of the suggestion image (character, item, etc.) displayed in the first notice effect is changed, the display position of the suggestion image is changed, and the jackpot reliability of the fluctuation is suggested. As long as it can be done, the production mode does not matter.

Next, Example 3 of the present invention will be described. In the third embodiment, regarding the special effect (RTC effect) that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the RTC function of the second embodiment described above, the advance notice effect function based on the preliminary determination result (hold look-ahead) of the special figure hold is provided. It is an added one.

Here, in the above-described second embodiment, the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) suggesting that the display result of the variable display currently being executed is the jackpot mode (specific display result) can be executed. That is, the third notice production can be executed as a notice production with 100% jackpot reliability (big hit notification production). In this third notice effect, for example, a predetermined notice image (big hit confirmation image) suggesting the big hit confirmation is displayed on the image display device, or a sound effect (big hit confirmation sound) suggesting the big hit confirmation is generated (speaker). It can be done by outputting from).

In the above-mentioned Example 2, the third notice effect can be executed as "the change notice", but in the present Example 3, in addition to that, it is based on the preliminary determination result (hold look-ahead) of the special figure hold. It is also possible to execute it as a "hold look-ahead notice". Then, the third advance notice effect as the hold look-ahead advance notice can be executed in cooperation with the special effect (RTC effect). In the third embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the special effect-related process (S4301) shown in FIG. 61 as the control related to the execution of the third notice effect. The special effect-related process (S4301) of the third embodiment shown in FIG. 61 replaces the special effect-related process (S4301) of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 55. Hereinafter, the special production-related processing (S4301) of the third embodiment will be described.

In the following, different codes and step numbers from those of Examples 1 and 2 will be used for configurations different from Examples 1 and 2, and the same codes and step numbers as those of Examples 1 and 2 will be used for common configurations. I will do it. Further, in the following, the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) will be described as including a sound effect (specific sound effect) in which a predetermined jackpot confirmed sound is output from the speaker 67.

[Special production-related processing of Example 3]
Of the special production-related processes (S4301) shown in FIG. 61, the processing contents of S5001 to S5004 are the same as the processing contents of S5001 to S5004 of the special production-related processing (S4301) of the second embodiment. The description of is omitted.

When it is determined in S5001 that the special effect execution flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S5001), that is, when the special effect is being executed (during the special effect period), it is the timing when the preceding effect ends. Judge whether or not (S5005). As described above, the special effect (RTC effect) provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a preceding effect and a main effect, and when the preceding effect is completed, the main effect is subsequently executed (started). It has become. The preceding effect is configured as a countdown effect that counts down until the main effect is started, and the numbers in the number image 200 (countdown image) are counted down by one (see FIG. 56 (a)). ). The S5005 determines whether or not the countdown display in the countdown effect is the timing (preceding effect end timing) of "0". In this determination, for example, the sub-control unit 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) activates a timer for measuring the execution time of the preceding effect triggered by the start of the preceding effect (transmission of a special effect start command), and the timer is activated. Can be done by referring to. As described above, since the preceding effect (countdown effect) is started about 5 seconds before the start of the main effect, the execution time of the preceding effect is about 5 seconds, and the timing when the 5 seconds have passed is the end timing. Alternatively, the sub-control board 90 and the image control board 100 are connected in a bidirectional communication manner, the countdown status of the numerical image 200 (countdown image) is monitored by the image control microcomputer 101, and the numerical value indicated by the numerical image 200. When becomes "0", a signal (feedback signal) indicating that fact can be output to the sub control unit 90, and the end timing of the preceding effect can be determined based on the input of the signal. ..

If it is determined by S5005 that it is not the end timing of the preceding effect (NO in S5005), this process ends without performing the process after S5006. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the preceding effect (YES in S5005), the effect hold information storage area of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is accessed, and the stored content (effect hold information) is checked (S5006). As described above, in the effect hold information storage area (acquisition information storage means), information such as the pre-judgment result and the hit type included in the start entry command transmitted from the main control unit 80 is stored as the effect hold information. , The stored content (effect hold information) matches the stored content (acquired information) of the special figure hold storage unit (first special figure hold storage unit, second special figure hold storage unit) of the main control unit 80. Therefore, by checking the storage content (effect hold information) of the effect hold information storage area, it is possible to determine the pre-determination result of the special figure hold that is currently stored.

Here, as described above, the effect hold information includes the special figure 1 effect hold information corresponding to the first special figure hold and the special figure 2 effect hold information corresponding to the second special figure hold, and the effect hold. The information storage area includes a special figure 1 effect hold information storage area for storing the special figure 1 effect hold information and a special figure 2 effect hold information storage area for storing the special figure 2 effect hold information. In the S5006, the target of the effect hold information to be checked is switched to the special figure 1 effect hold information or the special figure 2 effect hold information according to the game state at that time. Specifically, when the gaming state is the state A or the state B, the special figure 1 effect hold information is checked, and when the game state is C, the special figure 2 effect hold information is checked. This is because the states A and B are gaming states in which the variation display of the first special symbol is mainly performed, and the state C is the gaming state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed.

Next, in S5007, as a result of the check by S5006, whether or not the production hold information (specific production hold information) whose pre-judgment result is a big hit is included in the production hold information stored in the production hold information storage area. That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot hold (acquired information in which the display result of the variable display is the specific display result) is stored (S5007). Here, the jackpot types include "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot", "15R 5th jackpot", "2R 6th jackpot" and There is a "2R 7th jackpot". Of these, the 2R 6th jackpot and the 2R 7th jackpot are in a gaming state C (high accuracy and low base state) in which the amount of prize balls that the player can obtain is smaller than that of other jackpots and is advantageous for the player. Since it is a big hit that triggers the end of, it is not subject to judgment in S5007. That is, the 2R 6th jackpot and the 2R 7th jackpot are not subject to the 3rd notice production, and it is assumed that the 2R 6th jackpot and the 2R 7th jackpot hold (2R jackpot hold) are stored. However, the third notice effect based on this is not executed (cannot be executed). If this is the target of the third notice effect, it is disadvantageous for the player such that a large number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the state C (high accuracy and low base state) ends even though the third notice effect is executed. This is because a situation may occur and offend the player.

Therefore, in S5007, "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot" or "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot" or " If the jackpot hold of "15R 5th jackpot" is memorized, it is determined that the jackpot hold is memorized (YES in S5007), and the jackpot hold is not memorized (only the missed hold) or the memorized jackpot. If the hold is a 2R jackpot hold, it is determined that the jackpot hold is not stored (NO in S5007). Then, when it is determined that the jackpot hold is not stored (NO in S5007), this process is completed without performing the processing after S5008, and when it is determined that the jackpot hold is stored (YES in S5007), the first 3 Execute the notice effect (output the jackpot confirmation sound) and finish this process.

When the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed by the processing of S5008, a jackpot confirmation sound is generated at the timing when the countdown display in the countdown effect becomes "0" (preceding effect end timing) (output from the speaker 67). Will be). Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot hold is included in the special figure hold stored at that time. As a result, when the special effect is executed (started), the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed before the start of the main effect constituting the special effect. It is possible to improve the game entertainment. In particular, the preceding effect performed prior to the main effect is a countdown effect, and the countdown effect indicates the remaining period until the main effect is started, but when the third notice effect is executed. Also indicates the remaining period until the execution (countdown of the third notice effect), and the player considers that the timing when the countdown display becomes "0" (preceding effect end timing) is the execution timing of the third notice effect. Can also be recognized by. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the excitement of the player as the countdown effect approaches the end, and the interest in the period from the start of the special effect to the start of the main effect (especially the interest when the countdown effect ends) It becomes possible to increase.

If the gaming state when the third notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008 is the normal game state (state A), it is executed after the execution of the third notice effect, that is, after the end of the countdown effect (preceding effect). As shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, the display of the effect image (main effect image) related to the main effect may be performed not on the main liquid crystal but on the sub liquid crystal. It is confirmed that the game state will shift to the big hit game state (special game state) by digesting the big hit hold later, and eventually the production image according to the special game state will be displayed on the main liquid crystal. Because. In addition, while the main effect image is reduced and displayed on the sub liquid crystal, the effect display (reach effect, development effect, etc.) related to the jackpot fluctuation due to the digestion of the jackpot hold is displayed (larger) on the main liquid crystal or the like as usual. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect display (big hit variation effect) related to the jackpot fluctuation and enhance the interest.

In addition, when the third notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008, the jackpot hold that triggered the execution of the third notice effect is exhausted, and the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (specific display result is derived and displayed). Even if the effect image (main effect image) related to the main effect performed after the execution of the third notice effect (after the preceding effect) is hidden (invisible) until the big hit game is started (that is, until the big hit occurs). Good. This is also because it is possible to draw the player's attention to the jackpot fluctuation production accompanying the digestion of the jackpot hold and enhance the interest. In this case, the main effect image can be displayed (visible) with the start of the big hit game.

Furthermore, when the third notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008, a more premier effect (dedicated effect) is executed until the big hit occurs (the confirmation display of the big hit symbol or the start of the big hit game). Moi. By doing so, it is possible to make the effect of the third advance notice effect by being executed at the end of the countdown effect more remarkable. As such a premier effect, for example, displaying a dedicated image (dedicated image) suggesting the confirmation of the jackpot in the hold can be mentioned.

Further, in the third embodiment, the timing at which the third advance notice effect is executed by the processing of S5008 is set as the end timing of the preceding effect, that is, the timing when the number of the number image 200 displayed by the countdown effect becomes "0". However, the timing at which the third advance notice effect is executed can be any timing from the start of the preceding effect (special effect) to the end of the preceding effect (within the execution period of the preceding effect). Good. That is, the third advance notice effect may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect (preceding effect) to the end of the preceding effect based on the establishment of the execution condition of the special effect. For example, when the preceding effect is the above-mentioned countdown effect, the third notice effect is executed at the timing when the number of the numerical image 200 becomes a predetermined number between "5" and "0". Can be configured in. Even with this, when the special effect is executed (started), the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed before the start of the main effect constituting the special effect. , It becomes possible to improve the game entertainment.

When the third advance notice effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect (preceding effect) to the end of the preceding effect, the execution time (execution timing) may be determined. In this case, for example, the effect hold information was checked at the end timing of the preceding effect by the above-mentioned processes of S5005 and S5006, but instead of this, the effect hold information is checked at the start timing of the special effect, that is, the start timing of the preceding effect. Check. As a result, when the third notice effect is executed because the jackpot hold is stored, the timing of executing the third notice effect within the execution period of the preceding effect is determined by a random number lottery or the like. decide. As a result, the player does not know at what timing the third notice effect can be executed from the start of the special effect (preceding effect) to the end of the advance effect, so that the third notice effect can be executed. It is possible to further enhance the interest within the preceding production period.

Further, in the third embodiment, as a result of the effect hold information check by S5006, when the jackpot hold related to the jackpot other than the 2R jackpot is stored, the third notice effect is executed, but other than the 2R jackpot. Among the big hits, when the big hit hold (specific big hit hold) related to the specific big hit is stored, the third notice effect may be executed. Specifically, among "15R 1st jackpot", "4R 2nd jackpot", "4R 3rd jackpot", "4R 4th jackpot" and "15R 5th jackpot", the gaming state after the jackpot game is completed is the state. Big hit that becomes C (second game state), that is, big hit hold related to any one of "15R 1st big hit", "4R 2nd big hit" and "15R 5th big hit" (display result of variable display is displayed as 2nd specific display) When the acquired information as a result) is stored, the third notice effect is executed. In this case, the jackpot pending (display result of the variable display) pertaining to either "4R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot", which is a jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is state B (first gaming state). Is stored as the first specific display result), the third notice effect is not executed. In this way, when it is confirmed that the state C (high accuracy and low base state), which is the most advantageous gaming state for the player among the variable gaming states, is determined at the start of the special effect, the main effect The third notice effect will be executed before the start, and the third notice effect will announce the confirmation of the transition to the state C. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention regarding whether or not the third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) is executed when the special effect is executed. If the jackpot hold related to either "4R 3rd jackpot" or "4R 4th jackpot" is stored, instead of executing the 3rd notice effect, another notice effect may be executed. Good. In this way, depending on the type of advance notice effect that can be executed after the start of the special effect and before the start of the main effect, the jackpot hold that works relatively favorably for the player is stored, or the jackpot hold that is not so is stored. It is possible to suggest that it is possible to discriminate. This makes it possible to raise the player's interest in the advance notice effect that can be executed before the start of the main effect.

Next, Example 4 of the present invention will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the RTC functions of the above-mentioned embodiments 2 and 3 is provided with a cancel function capable of stopping the execution of the special effect (RTC effect) at the player's will. It was done. In order to realize this cancel function, the effect control microcomputer 91 of the sub-control board 90 executes the special effect cancel selection process (S4300) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) shown in FIG. 62. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of the fourth embodiment shown in FIG. 62 replaces the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) of Examples 1 and 2 shown in FIGS. 50 and 54. Hereinafter, the special production cancellation selection process (S4300) will be described.

In the following, different codes and step numbers from Examples 1 to 3 will be used for configurations different from Examples 1 to 3, and the same codes and step numbers as those of Examples 1 to 3 will be used for common configurations. I will do it.

[Special production cancellation selection process]
As shown in FIG. 63, in the special effect cancellation selection process (S4300), first, it is determined whether or not the reception period flag is OFF (S6001). Here, in this embodiment, apart from the effect button 63, an operation lever (not shown) for inputting an operation signal to the sub-control board 90 is provided around the upper plate 61 of the front frame 51. Like the effect button 63, this operation lever functions as an input means for the player to input. Then, the period during which the input of the operation signal based on the operation of the operation lever can be processed by the sub-control board 90 (microcomputer 91 for effect control) as valid is the "reception period" (operation valid period). ). The reception period flag is a flag indicating whether or not the reception period is in progress, and is turned ON when the reception period is in progress and OFF when the reception period is not in progress.

It should be noted that the reason why the operation lever is provided separately from the effect button 63 is that the execution timing of the effect (operation corresponding effect) based on the operation of the effect button 63 and the selection timing of execution / non-execution (stop) of the special effect overlap. It is due to consideration of what happened. That is, when the operation lever is not provided, the operation of the effect button 63 under the situation where the two timings overlap each other is either "operation-responsive effect" or "execution / non-execution (stop) selection". It is necessary to correspond to one or both, and the control becomes complicated accordingly. In order to avoid such complicated control, an operation lever is provided separately from the effect button 63.

If it is determined by S6001 that the reception period flag is not OFF (ON) (NO in S6001), the process proceeds to S6004 described later, and if it is determined that the reception period flag is OFF (YES in S6001), reception is accepted. Determine if it is the start timing of the period (S6002). In this embodiment, the time measured by the RTC 92 is configured so that the reception period occurs (sets) between before the start time (predetermined time) of the special effect and the start time. There is. Specifically, the reception period is from 30 seconds before the start time to 15 seconds. Therefore, the S6002 determines whether or not it is 30 seconds before the start of the special production, and if so, determines that it is the start timing of the reception period (YES in S6002), and if not, the reception period. It is judged that it is not the start timing of (NO in S6002). The start timing of the reception period and the length of the reception period are not limited to the time shown in this embodiment, and can be arbitrarily determined.

If it is determined by S6002 that it is not the start timing of the reception period (NO in S6002), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S6003, and if it is determined that it is the start timing of the reception period (YES in S6002), reception is accepted. Turn on the period flag (S6003) and set the selection screen display start command in the sub-output buffer (S6004). When the selection screen display start command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-mentioned command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 causes the player to select execution or cancellation of the special effect (selection image). The image data of the above is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the selection screen is displayed on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. At this time, when the variable effect or the jackpot game effect is executed on the display screen 7a, the selection screen is displayed on the front side of the effect image being executed. In addition, when the effect being executed is a specific effect having a relatively low appearance rate (selection rate) among a plurality of predetermined effects such as a super reach effect and a development effect, the wipe screen described above may be used. The selection screen may be displayed smaller than usual. Further, the display unit (selected image display unit) on which the selection screen is displayed does not have to be the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal, but may be any of the display screens 71a and 72a of the left and right sub liquid crystals.

Here, although the illustration of the selection screen is omitted, the content of the selection screen is, for example, when the special production is based on a serial drama as described above, "Do you want to watch the drama?" The message image of is displayed in the upper area of the screen, and the character image of "Yes" and the character image of "No" are displayed side by side or vertically or vertically below the message image, and "Yes" is displayed according to the operation of the operation lever. "Or" No "can be selected and displayed. The player recognizes the occurrence (start) of a period (reception period) in which the execution / non-execution (cancellation) of the special effect can be selected by displaying the selection screen on the display screen 7a of the main liquid crystal. Is possible, and while the selection screen is displayed, that is, by operating the operation lever during the reception period, "Yes" (execution of special effect) or "No" (non-execution of special effect) is selected. be able to.

In this embodiment, an operation lever is provided separately from the effect button 63, and "Yes" or "No" (execution / non-execution of the special effect) can be selected by operating the operation lever. However, the first effect button. It may be possible to select by operating either one or both of 63a and the second effect button 63b. Further, the input means provided separately from the effect button 63 does not have to be an operation lever, and may be, for example, a touch panel or a dial type switch.

Next, the S6005 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the reception period (S6005). In this embodiment, as described above, the reception period is 15 seconds from 30 seconds before the start of the special production. Therefore, the S6005 determines whether or not 15 seconds have passed since the start of the reception period (reception period flag ON), and if it has passed, it is determined that it is the end timing of the reception period (YES in S6005). If not, it is judged that it is not the end timing of the reception period (NO in S6005). In the determination of S6005, for example, the sub control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for production control) activates a timer for measuring the elapsed time of the reception period when the reception period starts (reception period flag ON). It can be done by referring to the timer.

If it is determined by S6005 that it is not the end timing of the reception period (NO in S6005), this processing is completed without performing the processing after S6006. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the reception period (YES in S6005), it is determined whether or not there is an instruction to cancel the special production scheduled to start after that (S6006). This determination is made by referring to the selection result on the selection screen described above. That is, when the reception period ends, it is determined whether "Yes" (execution of the special effect) or "No" (non-execution of the special effect) on the selection screen is selected, and "Yes" is displayed. If it is selected, it is determined that there was no instruction to cancel the special effect (NO in S6006), and if "No" is selected, it is determined that there was an instruction to cancel the special effect (YES in S6006).

If it is determined in S6006 that there was no instruction to cancel the special effect (NO in S6006), proceed to the processing of S6009 described later, and if it is determined that there was an instruction to cancel the special effect (YES in S6006), turn on the special effect flag. (S6007), and set the next special production information command in the sub output buffer (S6008). When the next special effect information command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the above-mentioned command transmission process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 has an image corresponding to the information related to the special effect (main effect) executed in the next cycle. The data is read from the ROM of the image control board 100, and the information is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal (information display unit). The information displayed at this time is the information displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal during the normal effect period described in the second embodiment (remaining time until the start of the next special effect, the next special effect (main effect)). Contents, etc.) are the same.

In this way, by displaying information about the next special effect based on the confirmation of the cancellation (cancellation) of this special effect, the player can know that this special effect has been canceled. You will be able to know about the special effects that will be possible next. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the game machine by adding the "special effect cancel function" and the "next special effect information display function" to the game machine having the RTC function.

In addition, the special effect cancellation flag turned on in S6007 is a flag indicating that the execution of this special effect is stopped (prohibited), and when the start time of the special effect comes, the special effect is executed (started). (See FIGS. 55 and 61) before the operation (before turning on the special effect execution flag). Then, when the start time of the special effect is reached (YES in S5002), if the special effect stop flag is ON, the special effect is not started (without setting the special effect start command). , Finish the process related to the start of the special effect (special effect related process). As a result, the special effect that was scheduled to be executed this time will not be executed. Although the special effect cancellation flag has reached the start time of the special effect, it is turned off when the time has passed without starting (executing) the special effect.

Next, the reception period flag turned ON in S6003 is turned off (S6009), the selection screen display end command is set in the sub-output buffer (S6010), and this process is completed. When the selection screen display end command is transmitted to the image control board 100 by the command transmission process (S4006) described above, the image control microcomputer 101 erases the selection screen displayed up to that point. As a result, the player can recognize the end of the reception period.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the player moves the operation lever through the selection screen displayed on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) during the reception period that occurs within the predetermined time before the start of the special effect. By performing the selection operation (input by the input means) by, it is possible to arbitrarily stop the execution of the special effect before the execution is started. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the gaming machine equipped with the RTC function by adding a cancel function of a special effect that is periodically executed based on the result of time counting by the RTC 92.

Further, in the above-described third embodiment, when the cancel function of the special effect according to the fourth embodiment is added, if the execution is stopped before the execution of the special effect is started, a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect The execution of the above-mentioned third notice effect (specific suggestion effect) that may be executed (at the end of the preceding effect in the third embodiment) is also canceled. As a result, it is possible to set (select) the execution mode of the effect according to the player's preference.

Here, in the normal production period outside the execution period of the special production (RTC production), as described above, information on the special production (main production) executed in the next cycle (also referred to as "next special production information"). Is displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal. That is, the remaining time until the next special effect is executed (started) and the content of the next special effect (main effect) are displayed on the display screen 72a of the right sub liquid crystal. In principle, this next special effect information is displayed until the main effect that constitutes the special effect is executed (started). However, the display content (display) of the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) depends on the effect mode of the variable effect (including the effect mode of the advance notice effect when the advance notice effect is executed) that is executed during the normal effect period. Aspect) may change.

Specifically, depending on the effect mode of the variation effect (and / or the advance notice effect), the next special effect information being displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) is hidden and the effect image related to the variation effect is displayed there. In some cases, the effect image related to the variable effect may be superimposed and displayed on the front side of the next special effect information being displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a). For example, when executing a variable effect, an effect image with a sense of unity (also referred to as an "integrated effect image") is displayed using the entire screen of the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a) and the left and right sub liquid crystals (display screens 71a, 72a). In this case, after hiding the next special effect information (image before the start) displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) before the display of the integrated effect image starts, the integrated effect image is displayed on the left and right sides of the main liquid crystal. Display on the sub LCD. In addition, while displaying the main effect image (effect pattern, effect hold image, background image, etc.) related to the variation effect on the main liquid crystal (display screen 7a), the notice image related to the variation is displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a). In this case, the preview image is superimposed on the next special effect information (image before the start) displayed on the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) before the display of the preview image is started. By changing the display content (display mode) of the right sub liquid crystal (display screen 72a) according to the effect mode (effect pattern) in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of effect display, which attracts the interest of the player. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game. This also applies to the left sub liquid crystal (display screen 71a).

In the above-described embodiment, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the effect symbol display unit are set as the subject of the game in the game state according to the game state (the first symbol described later). The variable display shall be synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol). That is, one effect symbol (three digits) is displayed on the effect symbol display unit, and by synchronizing with one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to the game state, the first special symbol is synchronized. It has a case and a case synchronized with the second special symbol. In this manner, the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the variable display of the first effect symbol is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second effect symbol is the second special symbol. The variable display may be performed in synchronization with the variable display of. Further, when both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed, the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (one of the special symbols) set as the subject of the game in the game state is displayed in a large size (subject). (Displayed as), and the effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the other special symbol) that is not the subject of the game may be displayed in a small size. Specifically, the display area is 1/5 or less. Further, instead of displaying both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol at all times, both the first effect symbol and the second effect symbol are displayed according to the game state and the game situation, and the first effect symbol is displayed. One of the effect symbol and the second effect symbol (main symbol) may be displayed.

In addition, with respect to the above-mentioned configuration of the game machine, a "variable ball entry port" that can be changed into a state in which a game ball can enter a ball and a state in which a game ball cannot enter a ball cannot be entered. It is possible to provide a "special game execution means" capable of executing a special game in which the variable ball entry port is in a state where the ball can be entered when the result of the 1st hit / miss determination or the 2nd hit / fail determination is a hit. Further, the "second starting port" may be a variable starting port that can be changed into the first aspect and the second aspect in which the possibility of entering the game ball is higher than that of the first aspect. In addition, a game state in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is a predetermined frequency (first game state), and a game in which the frequency of entry of the game ball into the variable start port is higher than that of the game state. It can be provided with a "game state setting means" for setting a state (second game state). Here, it is assumed that 0 is included in the "predetermined frequency".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set to one, but the number of times the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening is opened in one round is set. It may be multiple times or may have different open times. Further, in this embodiment, the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold are control processes that can be changed at the same time, but the second special figure hold is preferentially digested over the first special figure hold. , So-called special figure 2 priority control process, control process of preferentially digesting the first special figure hold over the second special figure hold, so-called special figure 1 priority control process may be performed. In addition, no priority is set for the digestion of the first special figure hold and the digestion of the second special figure hold, and the oldest memorized one of the first special figure hold and the second special figure hold is digested in order. It may be a control treatment, a so-called ball entry order (memory order) digestion control process.

In addition, it is a type of pachinko gaming machine that does not have a probability setting means (no high probability state), has a specific area inside, and is in a ball-entry state in which a game ball can enter and a game ball can enter. It is equipped with a large winning opening that can be changed to an impossible entry impossible state, and the large winning opening is in a state where it is possible to enter the ball for a predetermined time when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry to the starting opening is a small hit. When a game ball enters a large winning opening that is ready for a ball and the game ball passes through a specific area, it becomes a big hit and a big hit game is executed, which is also applied to a pachinko gaming machine to which a predetermined privilege is given. This pachinko game machine is a so-called type 1 type 2 mixer, and when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the entry into the starting port becomes a big hit, the big hit game is executed without requiring passage to a specific area. In addition, as a privilege, it is possible to generate a high base state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the starting port is increased. In addition, it has a first starting port and a second starting port, and can generate a high base state that increases the frequency of entering the ball into the second starting port. The present invention can be applied to all these types of gaming machines.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the jackpot probability can be set to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability) by inactivating / operating the probability fluctuation function, but the type (number) of the jackpot probability Is not limited to this, and for example, three or more kinds of probabilities can be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) higher than a low probability (first probability) and lower than a high probability (second probability). May be good. Further, the first low probability and the first high probability (first probability condition), the second low probability and the second high probability (second probability condition), the third low probability and the third high probability (third probability condition), etc. , Multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low probability and high probability are provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions can be arbitrarily set (selectable) when the power of the game machine is turned on, for example. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special figure hold storage unit is read out for the preliminary determination based on the starting ball, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is determined. Although it was supposed to be (preliminary judgment) ("Starting ball entry processing (S205)". See FIGS. 11, 13, etc.), the pre-judgment method is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special figure reservation storage unit, a main control unit or a sub control unit stores an area (acquisition information storage means) for storing acquisition information (that is, acquisition information acquired based on the start-in ball) to be pre-determined. It may be provided in the RAM of the unit and the acquired information stored in the storage area (predetermination storage unit) may be determined (predetermined). In this case, by storing the result of the pre-determination in the RAM of the main control unit or the sub-control unit, it is possible to erase the acquired information (acquired information stored in another storage area) used for the pre-determination. Alternatively, instead of pre-determining the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit, the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball may be pre-determined. That is, the acquired information may be determined in advance before being stored in the special figure reservation storage unit. In this case, it is not necessary to provide an area for storing the acquired information to be pre-determined separately from the special figure reservation storage unit, and it is also necessary to read the acquired information stored in the special figure reservation storage unit for the pre-determination. Absent.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, one image display device 7 (board side display means) is provided as a main liquid crystal (main display device) on the game board side (inside the game area), and the game machine frame side (outside the game area). ) Was provided with two image display devices 71 and 72 (frame-side display means) as sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices), but sub-liquid crystals (sub-display devices) may be provided on the side of the game board 2. In this case, instead of the two sub liquid crystals (second image display device 71 and third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment, two sub liquid crystals are used as the panel side display means as the main liquid crystal (first image display). It may be provided on the left and right sides of the device 7), or one sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board side instead of one of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 (left sub liquid crystal or right sub liquid crystal). Can be done. Alternatively, it is also possible to provide one or more sub-liquid crystals on the game board side while providing the two sub-liquid crystals (second image display device 71, third image display device 72) shown in the above-described embodiment. is there. This also makes it possible to display various effects with impact by a plurality of image display devices.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the display device (first image display device 7) provided on the game board side (inside the game area) and the display device (second image) provided on the game machine frame side (outside the game area). The display device 71 and the third image display device 72) were all image display devices composed of a liquid crystal display device (liquid crystal display device), but the type of display device is not limited to the liquid crystal display, for example, a drum display device or the like. It is also possible to use a dot display, a 7-segment display, or the like. Further, different types of display devices may be mixed in the plurality of display devices including the main display device and the sub display device. Specifically, for example, among the first to third image display devices shown in the above-described embodiment, the first image display device 7 is a drum display or a 7-segment display, and the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 71. The image display device 72 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment. Alternatively, the first image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display as in the embodiment, and one or both of the second image display device 71 and the third image display device 72 may be a dot display. As a result, it is possible to display various effects by a plurality of display devices having different display methods, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Other]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (Examples) disclosed in the present specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
The conventional game machine is provided with a first starting port, a second starting port, a first large winning opening, and a second large winning opening, and when a game ball enters the first starting port, the first symbol is variablely displayed and the first symbol is displayed. 2 When a game ball enters the starting port, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the first symbol or the second symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, only one of the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening is opened, or the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening are opened. There was a game machine that executes a big hit game in which the winning openings are opened in a predetermined order (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-055811).

Further, in the conventional game machine, the second starting port is a variable starting port, the ball entering frequency is lowered in the low base state, and the ball entering frequency is increased in the high base state. There was a game aimed at one starting port, and in a high base state, a game was aimed at the second starting port. In addition, there is a game machine that performs a so-called right-handed game in which a game is aimed at the right side area of the game area in a big hit game or a high base state. In such a game machine, in a low base state, a left-handed game is performed, and once the advantageous state is reached, a right-handed game is played until the advantageous state ends, and the game in the advantageous state is sharpened. Met. However, in the conventional gaming machine, the transition mode of the gaming state is uniform, and it has not been possible to provide a highly tasteful gaming property.

The present reference invention 1 has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and unlike the conventional gaming machine, it provides a highly tasteful gaming state, diversifies the transition mode of the gaming state, and enhances the gaming interest. It provides a game machine.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is
The first starting port where the game ball can enter and
A second starting port that can be changed into a first state and a second state in which a game ball is more likely to enter than the first state.
The third starting port where the game ball can enter and
A first hit / fail determination executing means that executes a first hit / fail determination based on a ball entering the first start port or the second start port, and
A second hit / fail determination execution means for executing a second hit / fail determination to be executed based on the ball entering the third start port, and
A first gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is a predetermined frequency, and a second gaming state in which the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than in the first gaming state. , And the game state setting means that can be set,
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the first hit / fail determination or the second hit / fail determination is a big hit (first specific result), and the first start The mouth is provided in the first game area,
The second starting port and the third starting port are provided in the second gaming area.
A first game (low probability low base state) in which a game ball is launched into the first game area in the first game state and executed mainly by the first hit / fail determination, and the second game in the second game state. A second game (low accuracy and high base state) in which a game ball is launched into an area and executed mainly based on the first hit / fail determination, and a game ball is launched into the second game area in the first game state to execute the first game. 2 It is characterized by having a third game (high accuracy and low base state) that is mainly executed by a hit / fail judgment.

According to such a game machine, a first start port for executing the first hit / fail judgment is arranged in the first game area, and the first hit / fail judgment is executed in the second game area (first state and second state). A variable second starting port and a third starting port for executing the second hit / fail determination are arranged. Further, as the gaming state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is low (predetermined frequency) in the first game state, and the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting port is higher than that in the first gaming state. It has a high second gaming state. Then, in the first game state, the first game is launched by aiming at the first start port of the first game area and the first hit / fail judgment is mainly executed, and in the second game state, the second start port of the second game area is executed. The first game, which is mainly executed by aiming at the first hit / fail judgment, and the second game, which is mainly executed by aiming at the third start port of the second game area in the first game state and executing the second hit / fail judgment. It has one game and.

As a result, the player can play the first game, the second game, and the third game having different game modes according to the transition of the game state, and enhance the game interest by the transition mode of various game states and the new game characteristics. It will be possible. In the first game state, the frequency of ball entry to the first game area and the ball to enter the first start port is higher than the frequency of ball entry to the second game area to enter the second start port. May be higher.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a first big hit and a second big hit.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area, the player has a third big hit and a fourth big hit.
In the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / miss determination is the second big hit, the third game can be executed. age,
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail determination is the third big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the result of the second hit / miss determination is the fourth big hit, the third game can be executed. It is characterized by the fact that.

According to such a game machine, the result of the first hit / fail determination in the first game in which the game ball is launched into the first game area, and the first hit / fail determination in the second game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. As a result, it has a first big hit and a second big hit, and has a third big hit and a fourth big hit as a result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game in which the game ball is launched into the second game area. Then, in the first game after the start of the game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first big hit, the second game can be executed, and when the second big hit is reached, the third game can be executed. Further, in the case of the second game, the second game can be executed when the result of the first hit / fail judgment in the second game becomes the first big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the second big hit. Further, in the case of the third game, the second game can be executed when the result of the second hit / fail determination in the third game becomes the third big hit, and the third game can be executed when the result becomes the fourth big hit.

As a result, regardless of whether the first big hit or the second big hit is obtained by the first game after the start of the game, the subsequent game is played by firing a game ball into the second game area. Further, regardless of whether the second game or the third game is performed while performing the game to be launched into the second game area, the game (second game) in which the first hit / fail judgment is performed and the second game 2 It is possible to play a game while shifting the game mode (game state) with the game (third game) for which the hit / fail judgment is performed. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2.
In the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state based on the execution of the first hit / fail determination a specific number of times, and the game shifts to the first game. ..

According to such a game machine, when the first hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times in the second game, the second game state becomes the first game state, and the game shifts to the first game. As a result, the game shifts from the second game to the first game by executing the hit / fail determination a specific number of times. Further, in the game that executes the same first hit / fail determination, the game shifts from the launch game to the second game area to the launch game to the first game area. In addition, this makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game by changing the transition mode of various game states and new game playability.

In the third game, the third game may be continued even if the second hit / fail determination is executed a specific number of times. Further, in the third game, the third game may be continued until the result of the second hit / fail determination is a big hit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 to Reference Invention 1-3.
As a result of the second hit / fail determination, a small hit (second specific result) is obtained, and when the small hit is reached, a predetermined amount of game profit can be obtained.
The second hit / fail determination is more likely to be the small hit than the first hit / fail determination.
In the second game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail determination is higher than that of the first game, so that the reduction speed of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game.
The third game is characterized in that the rate of decrease of the game medium is slower than that of the second game by making it possible to obtain a game profit by the small hit.

According to such a game machine, it has a small hit that can obtain a predetermined amount of game profit as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, and the second hit / fail judgment has a higher probability than the first hit / fail judgment. It is supposed to be a hit. That is, the third game has a higher probability of being a small hit than the first and second games. Further, in the second game in the second game state, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail determination is higher than in the first game in the first game state. In the second game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the first game, and in the third game, the rate of decrease of the game medium used for the game is slower than that of the second game. As a result, the third game is a game that is more advantageous than the second game, and the second game is a game that is more advantageous than the first game. Further, as a result, it is possible to diversify the transition mode among various gaming states having different advantages, and to enhance the gaming interest by new game characteristics. It should be noted that the result of the second hit / fail determination may be a small hit, and the result of the first hit / fail determination may be no small hit.

Further, in the second game state, there may be a fourth game (high accuracy and high base state) in which the game ball is launched into the second game area and the first hit / fail determination is mainly executed. Further, the fourth game may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, in the fourth game, the execution frequency of the first hit / fail judgment is higher than that in the first game, so that the reduction speed of the game medium is slower than in the first game, and the third game is a game by a small hit. By making it possible to obtain profits, the rate of decrease of the game medium may be slower than that of the second game and the fourth game. Further, since both the second game and the fourth game are in the second game state, the decreasing speed of the game medium may be substantially the same.

Further, in the first game, when the result of the first hit / fail determination is the first jackpot (corresponding to the 4R fourth jackpot of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail determination is the second jackpot (corresponding to the second jackpot When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of the first embodiment are reached, the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of the first embodiment). Make the 4th game executable
In the second game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. Make the game executable
In the third game, when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the third big hit (corresponding to the 2R 7th big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the second hit / fail judgment is the fourth big hit (Example). When the 15R 5th jackpot of 1 is reached, the 3rd game can be executed, and when the result of the 2nd hit / fail judgment is the 6th jackpot (corresponding to the 2R 6th jackpot of Example 1), the 4th game can be executed. ,
In the fourth game, when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the first big hit (corresponding to the 4R fourth big hit of Example 1), the second game can be executed, and the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the second big hit (Example). When the 15R first jackpot and the 4R second jackpot of 1 are reached), the third game can be executed, and when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is the fifth jackpot (corresponding to the 4R third jackpot of Example 1), the fourth game is executed. The game may be executable.

The "decrease rate of the game medium used for the game" is given in the same period from the game medium (fired game ball) used in a unit time (for example, 1 minute) or a unit number of shots (for example, 100 shots). The number obtained by subtracting the game media (paid out prize balls) is calculated as the number of reductions in the game media (game balls). In the first game, the second game, the third game, and the fourth game, when the game is played for a predetermined period, the decrease speed of the game medium (game ball, possession ball) owned by the player is in descending order of the decrease speed. , 1st game> 2nd game (4th game)> 3rd game. In the third game, the more the game is continued, the more balls can be held by a small hit, so that the decrease speed can be said to be negative. That is, the first game, the second game, and the fourth game are in a state of playing while reducing the number of balls held, while the third game is in a state of playing while increasing the number of balls held.

In addition, the jackpot type (first jackpot type) when the result of the first hit / fail judgment is a big hit is more than the jackpot type (second jackpot type) when the result of the second hit / fail judgment is a jackpot. It may be many. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the second hit / fail judgment, there are cases where the prize ball is obtained after a jackpot game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball, and a case where the prize ball is acquired. It is assumed that there is a case where the third game is reached after an easy jackpot game. In addition, as the third game (high accuracy and low base state) that occurs as a result of the first hit / fail judgment, there is no case where the prize ball goes through a big hit game in which it is difficult to obtain the prize ball. It may be possessed only when it becomes the third game after the big hit game which is easy to acquire.

In addition, the probability of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is set to be higher than the probability of a big hit in the high probability, and the possibility of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination can be increased. More preferably, it is desirable that the probability of occurrence of a small hit in the second hit / fail determination is 1/2 or more. Further, the probability of entering the high probability state (probability of operating the probability fluctuation function) is the same in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment. On the other hand, the probability of entering the state C (high probability / low base state) may be different between the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment, and the second hit / fail judgment state C (high probability / low base state) is reached. The rush probability of is higher than the first hit / fail judgment. As a result, it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the launch game to the second game area in which the third game for which the second hit / fail determination is performed can be executed, and to enhance the game interest.

In addition, in the second hit / fail judgment, if a big hit does not enter the state C (high accuracy / low base state), the big hit is the number of prize balls that can be obtained among the big hits (big hit game) in the second hit / fail judgment. Is the least big hit (big hit game). Further, the big hit is a big hit (big hit game) in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained is the smallest among the big hits (big hit game) in the first hit / fail judgment and the second hit / fail judgment.

According to the game machine of the reference invention 1, it is possible to provide a game machine that enhances the interest of the game by diversifying the transition mode of the game state.

(Reference Invention 2)
In some conventional game machines, a hit / fail judgment is made based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the symbol is variablely displayed based on the result of the hit / miss judgment. In such a game machine, if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, and if the result of the hit / miss judgment is wrong, the symbol is stopped and displayed with the missed symbol. .. Further, as a symbol, there is a gaming machine having a plurality of symbols of a special symbol and an effect symbol (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-370).

In addition, the special symbol and the effect symbol of the conventional game machine are both variable display and stop display based on the result of the hit / fail determination. In addition, the special symbol shows the result of the hit / fail judgment by stopping and displaying the change display without performing the game effect such as the reach variation, and the effect symbol shows the stop display by performing the game effect such as the reach variation after the variation display. This shows the result of the pass / fail judgment. By having a plurality of symbols in this way, it is possible to control the display according to the purpose of each symbol.

However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is not easy to confirm the consistency between the two symbols due to the relationship between the display mode and the display position of the plurality of symbols. The present invention 2 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a fair game machine by facilitating confirmation of a plurality of symbols by displaying a plurality of symbols.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is
A pass / fail judgment execution means that executes a pass / fail judgment based on the establishment of a predetermined condition,
The first identification information display unit (first special symbol display 41a, second special symbol display 41b) that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A second identification information display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b) that variablely displays the second identification information (effect symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A third identification information display unit (variable state indicator 49) that variablely displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) based on the result of the hit / fail determination, and
A game effect display unit (effect symbol display unit 7b, first display screen 7a) capable of displaying a game effect (reach effect, etc.) executed in association with the variable display of the second identification information.
A gaming machine provided with a special game execution means capable of executing a special game when the result of the hit / fail determination is a specific result.
A first display unit (main display 40) having the first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and
It is characterized by including a second display unit (image display device 7, display screen 7a) having the second identification information display unit and the game effect display unit.

According to such a game machine, a first identification information display unit that variablely displays the first identification information (special symbol, first special symbol, second special symbol) and a second identification information (effect symbol) are variablely displayed. It is possible to display the second identification information display unit, the third identification information display unit that displays the third identification information (state symbol, confirmation symbol) in a variable manner, and the game effect executed in accordance with the variable display of the second identification information. It has a game effect display unit. Further, a first display unit having a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit, and a second display unit having a second identification information display unit and a game effect display unit. It has a department.

As a result, it is possible to confirm the second identification information indicating the result of the hit / fail judgment and the game effect by checking the second display unit, and based on the result of the hit / miss judgment by checking the first display unit. It is possible to confirm the first identification information and the third identification information that are displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1.
A game machine having a game area in which a game ball can flow down, and playing a game by letting the game ball flow down into the game area.
The first display unit is provided inside the game area, and the second display unit is provided outside the game area.

According to such a game machine, a first display unit having a first identification information display unit and the third identification information display unit is arranged outside (outside) the game area, and a second identification is performed. A second display unit having an information display unit and a game effect display unit is arranged inside (inside) the game area. As a result, by providing a second display unit in the game area that displays the result of the game effect such as the reach effect and the result of the hit / miss determination, the second display unit is provided while checking the flow of the game ball. It is possible to confirm the display mode of. In addition, the first display unit on which the first identification information and the third identification information can be confirmed is separated from the second display unit and arranged outside the game area, so that the first display unit is not confused by the game production or the like. It is possible to surely grasp the display mode of the identification information and the third identification information.

The first display unit is arranged outside the game area (the area outside the rail member that divides the game area), and the second display unit is inside the game area (the area inside the rail member that divides the game area). It may be arranged in.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2.
The first display unit is composed of LEDs, and the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals.
The second display unit is characterized in that it is larger than the first display unit.

According to such a game machine, the first display unit is composed of LEDs, the second display unit is composed of liquid crystals, and the second display unit is a display unit larger than the first display unit. As a result, the display mode of the first display unit can be simplified to ensure that the display modes of the first identification information and the third identification information can be grasped, and the second display unit is larger than the first display unit. In addition, by configuring it with liquid crystal, it is possible to execute a variety of game productions and enhance the game's interest.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3.
A main control unit having the hit / fail determination executing means,
It has a sub-control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control.
The first identification information display unit constituting the first display unit is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit and the second display unit constituting the first display unit are displayed by the sub control unit. It is characterized by display control.

According to such a game machine, it has a main control unit and a sub control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs control. Then, among the first display units, the first identification information display unit is displayed and controlled by the main control unit, and the third identification information display unit is displayed and controlled by the sub control unit. Further, the display control of the second display unit that displays the game effect and the second identification information is performed by the sub control unit. That is, the first display unit displays the first identification information whose display is controlled by the main control unit and the third identification information whose display is controlled by the sub control unit. As a result, by confirming the first display unit, it is possible to confirm both the display modes of the identification information (first identification information and the third identification information) controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit. Further, this makes it possible to easily confirm the consistency of the identification information controlled by the main control unit and the sub control unit.

The main control unit is a control unit that executes a control related to display control of a special symbol, a control related to a hit / fail judgment, a game related to sensor detection, a control related to ejection of a prize ball, and a control related to opening and closing of a variable ball entrance, and a control unit that controls the game. Is. Further, the sub control unit is a control unit that receives a control signal from the main control unit and performs predetermined control, and controls the operation of the movable member and the display control of the effect display unit to control the game effect. It is a subordinate control unit of the control unit.

Further, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-4.
A game information storage means that can store predetermined game information,
Power supply means (power supply board 109) for supplying power and
Based on the detection of a decrease in the power supply voltage, the game information stored in the game information storage means can be stored for a predetermined period of time even after the power supply is stopped.
A game information recovery means for recovering game information when a decrease in power supply voltage is detected based on the game information stored and held by the storage holding means when the power supply means starts power supply is provided.
When the game information recovery means recovers game information, the third identification information display unit recovers faster than the second display unit, and display control can be executed.

According to such a game machine, when the power supply is started, the game information recovery means for recovering the game information when the memory holding means detects a decrease in the power supply voltage based on the game information stored in the memory is provided. .. Then, when the game information is restored, the third identification information display unit possessed by the first display unit is restored earlier than the second display unit, and the display control can be executed. The second display unit is composed of a liquid crystal to diversify the game production, and it takes a certain amount of time to restore the game information because various display controls are performed. On the other hand, since the first display unit (third identification information display unit), which is simply configured with LEDs, performs simple display control, it does not take a long time to recover the game information.

As a result, even if the display unit is controlled by the same sub-control unit, the third identification information display unit can be restored prior to the second display unit, and the display control can be executed as soon as possible. In addition, this makes it possible to start the game immediately after the start of power supply in accordance with the return of the main control unit, but it takes time to restore the second display unit composed of the liquid crystal (it is still restored even after the start of the game). Not). Even in such a situation, it is possible to confirm the display contents to be displayed and controlled by the sub-control unit by confirming the third identification information display unit which has spread quickly and can start the display control.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention 2, it is possible to easily confirm a plurality of symbols and provide a fair gaming machine by displaying a plurality of symbols.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, a game machine is provided with an effect device such as a liquid crystal display, a movable accessory (gimmick), and a speaker, and various effects are executed according to the progress of the game. Some of these types of gaming machines have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special effect different from the usual effect as the game progresses every time a predetermined time is measured. By installing a plurality of game machines having such a function side by side on the island facility in the game hall, special effects by the plurality of game machines can be executed all at once at a predetermined cycle (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -180295 (see).

However, the function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals has already been well known, and simply providing the function is not sufficient to improve the game entertainment.

The present reference invention 3 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is
Identification information display means that can display identification information,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result.
A special effect period generating means capable of generating a special effect period in which a special effect image is displayed on a predetermined display unit at a predetermined cycle,
Equipped with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display may be the specific display result.
It is characterized in that the suggestion effect can be executed in different modes depending on whether the special effect period has occurred or when the special effect period has occurred.

According to such a game machine, a specific display is made when a special effect period that can occur in a predetermined cycle does not occur (during a period other than the special effect period) and when it occurs (during the special effect period). It is said that the suggestion effect suggesting the derivability (expectation) of the result can be performed in different modes. For this reason, the mode (production content) of the suggested production may differ between the period other than the special production period (hereinafter, also referred to as the "normal production period") and the special production period, and it is suitable for each of the normal production period and the special production period. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect in a mode (effect content). As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of both the special effect period (display of the special effect image) and the suggestion effect, and improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above.
The suggestion effect is an image whose display mode can be changed, and is executed by displaying a suggestion image suggesting the high or low possibility according to the display mode on a predetermined display unit.
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed when the special effect period does not occur, the first suggestion image is displayed on the first display unit as the suggestion image.
When the suggestion effect is executed when the special effect period occurs, a second suggestion image different from the first suggestion image is displayed as the suggestion image on a second display unit different from the first display unit. 1 It is characterized in that it is displayed smaller than the suggested image.

According to such a game machine, when the suggestion effect is executed during the normal effect period, the suggestion effect is executed by displaying the first suggestion image whose display mode can be changed on the first display unit. To. On the other hand, when the suggestion effect is executed during the special effect period, the suggestion effect is executed by displaying the second suggestion image whose display mode can be changed on the second display unit different from the first display unit. The second suggestion image in this case is displayed smaller than the first suggestion image. For this reason, in the suggestion effect that is normally executed during the effect period, the suggestion image (first suggestion image) is displayed prominently to draw the player's attention to the display mode (suggestion effect), while during the special effect period. In the suggestion effect to be executed, the suggestion image (second suggestion image) is displayed conservatively so as not to impair the effect of the special effect image, and it is suggested that the display result of the variable display may be a specific display result. Is possible. As a result, it is possible to make a suggestion effect of a different impression between the normal effect period and the special effect period, and it is possible to attract the interest of the player to the difference.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 described above.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a high-expectation effect that suggests that the above possibility is high.
When the suggestion effect is executed and then the high expectation effect is executed when the special effect period has not occurred, the display mode of the first suggestion image displayed in the suggestion effect is a predetermined display mode. The high-expectation effect is executed after a predetermined time has passed since the change to.
From the time when the display mode of the first suggested image is changed to the predetermined display mode until the predetermined time elapses, a timer image showing the elapse of the predetermined time is displayed on a predetermined display unit. Is what you do.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to execute a high-expectation effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to be a specific display result, and the suggestion effect is performed during the normal effect period. Is executed and the display mode of the first suggestion image changes to a predetermined display mode, a high expectation effect is executed after a lapse of a predetermined time from the change. Then, from the time when the display mode of the first suggested image is changed to the predetermined display mode until the predetermined time elapses, a timer image showing the elapse of the predetermined time is displayed on the predetermined display unit. Therefore, in the normal effect period, the player is first focused on whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and when the suggestion effect is executed, the player is placed in the display mode of the first suggestion image in the suggestion effect. When the display mode of the first suggestion image becomes a predetermined display mode, it is possible to draw attention to the timer image showing the remaining time until the high expectation effect is executed. .. This makes it possible to effectively raise the expectation of the player waiting for the execution (occurrence) of the high-expectation effect, and improve the game interest when the special effect period does not occur (during the normal effect period). It becomes possible.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 or 3-2 described above.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a high-expectation effect that suggests that the above possibility is high.
When the high-expectation effect is executed, it is characterized in that the suggestion effect can be executed prior to the execution.

According to such a game machine, when a high expectation effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the identification information is likely to be a specific display result is executed, the suggestion effect is executed prior to the execution. It is possible. Therefore, by executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the subsequent execution (occurrence) of the high expectation effect. This makes it possible to raise the player's interest in the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 or 3-4 described above.
The effect executing means is characterized in that the high expectation effect can be executed in the same mode when the special effect period does not occur and when the special effect period occurs. Is.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to execute a high-expectation effect in the same manner during the normal effect period and the special effect period. Therefore, regardless of whether or not the special production period has occurred, it is possible to make the high-expectation production the same mode (effect content). As a result, it is possible to standardize the high-expectation production and make the production easy for the player to understand.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-6 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 or 3-4 described above.
The effect executing means is characterized in that the high-expectation effect can be executed in different modes depending on whether the special effect period has occurred or the special effect period has occurred. Is.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to execute a high-expectation effect in a different manner between a normal effect period and a special effect period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a high-expectation effect in a mode (effect content) suitable for each of the normal effect period and the special effect period. As a result, it is possible to differentiate the high-expectation production and attract the player's interest to the difference.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 3, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

(Reference Invention 4)
Conventionally, a game machine is provided with an effect device such as a liquid crystal display, a movable accessory (gimmick), and a speaker, and various effects are executed according to the progress of the game. Some of these types of gaming machines have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special effect different from the usual effect as the game progresses every time a predetermined time is measured. By installing a plurality of game machines having such a function side by side on the island facility in the game hall, special effects by the plurality of game machines can be executed all at once at a predetermined cycle (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -180295 (see).

However, there is still room for improvement in game machines equipped with a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

The present reference invention 4 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the convenience of a game machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is
In a game machine that plays a game using a predetermined game medium,
Input means for the player to input,
Timekeeping means that can measure time and
Equipped with a production control means that can control the production,
The effect control means
It is possible to execute a special effect based on the result of timekeeping by the timekeeping means.
Within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect, a reception period for accepting input by the input means is generated.
It is characterized in that it is possible to cancel the execution of the special effect based on the input by the input means during the reception period.

According to such a game machine, a reception period for accepting input by the input means occurs within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect that can be executed based on the result of timekeeping by the timekeeping means, and the reception period It is possible to cancel the execution of the special effect based on the input by the input means of. Therefore, by inputting using the input means during the reception period, the player can arbitrarily stop the execution of the special effect before the execution starts. As a result, it is possible to add a cancel function of a special effect based on the result of timekeeping to improve convenience.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 described above.
The effect control means
During the reception period, a selected image prompting the player to select whether to execute or not execute the special effect is displayed on a predetermined selected image display unit.
When the result of the input by the input means in the reception period is the selection result to the effect that the special effect is not executed, the execution of the special effect is stopped.

According to such a game machine, the selected image is displayed in the reception period before the start of the special production, and the result of the input made during the reception period is the selection result that the special production is not executed. In some cases, the execution of the special effect is stopped. Therefore, the player can see the selected image displayed during the reception period and select the execution or non-execution of the special effect by the input means. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize the occurrence of the reception period through the display of the selected image, and to make the player make a selection related to the execution or non-execution of the special effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or 4-2 described above.
The effect control means is characterized in that, when the execution of the special effect is stopped, information on the special effect to be executed based on the result of the next time measurement is displayed on a predetermined information display unit. ..

According to such a game machine, when the execution of the special effect is stopped based on the input by the input means, the information regarding the special effect to be executed based on the result of the next timekeeping is displayed. Therefore, by seeing the display of the information regarding the next special effect, the player can know the execution of the special effect this time and the next possible special effect. As a result, it is possible to improve convenience by adding an information display (notification) function regarding the special effect scheduled to be executed next time in addition to the cancel function of the special effect scheduled to be executed this time.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 4-1 to 4-3 described above.
A first image display means provided so that the displayed contents can be visually recognized at substantially the center of the game area formed on the game board.
A second image display means provided so that the display content can be visually recognized at a location outside the center of the game area.
A game state control means capable of setting a game state to a special game state advantageous to the player based on the establishment of a predetermined condition is provided.
The special effect is executed by displaying a predetermined special effect image.
The effect control means
In the special gaming state, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the first image display means, and at the same time,
When the special effect is executed in the special game state, the special effect image is displayed on the second image display means.
When the special effect is executed when the game is not in the special game state, the special effect image is displayed on the first image display means.

According to such a game machine, the first image display means provided so that the display content can be visually recognized in the substantially center of the game area, and the display content can be visually recognized at a place outside the center of the game area. In the special game state, a predetermined effect image corresponding to the special game state is displayed on the first image display means (also referred to as the main display means), and the special game is provided. When the special effect is executed in the state, the special effect image related to the special effect is displayed on the second image display means. On the other hand, when the special effect is executed when the game is not in the special game state, the special effect image related to the special effect is displayed on the first image display means. Therefore, the display location of the special effect image becomes the first image display means or the second image, depending on whether or not the game situation when the special effect is executed based on the timekeeping result is the special game state. It can be a display means. As a result, it is possible to appropriately display the special effect image related to the special effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-5 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-4 described above.
The special effect image displayed on the second image display means is characterized in that the display size is smaller than that of the special effect image displayed on the first image display means.

According to such a game machine, when the special effect image is displayed on the second image display means, the display size of the special effect image is larger than that when the special effect image is displayed on the first image display means. It is supposed to be small. Therefore, when the special effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the special effect image related to the special effect is displayed small on the second image display means. As a result, even if the special effect is executed during the execution of the special game, the special effect image can be displayed without interfering with the visibility of the image for the special game.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 4, it is possible to improve the convenience of a game machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

(Reference Invention 5)
Conventionally, a game machine is provided with an effect device such as a liquid crystal display, a movable accessory (gimmick), and a speaker, and various effects are executed according to the progress of the game. Some of these types of gaming machines have a function of using a real-time clock (RTC) or the like to execute a special effect different from the usual effect as the game progresses every time a predetermined time is measured. By installing a plurality of game machines having such a function side by side on the island facility in the game hall, special effects by the plurality of game machines can be executed all at once at a predetermined cycle (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -180295 (see).

However, the function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals has already been well known, and simply providing the function is not sufficient to improve the game entertainment.

The present reference invention 5 has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 is
An acquisition information storage means that can store the acquisition information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and
A determination means for determining the acquired information and
Identification information display means for variable display of identification information based on the result of the determination,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result, and
Timekeeping means that can measure time and
Equipped with a production execution means that can execute the production,
The effect executing means is
A special production that includes the main production and a preliminary production that is performed prior to the main production,
It is possible to execute a specific suggestion effect suggesting that the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result.
While executing the special effect based on the result of timekeeping by the timekeeping means,
The specific suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect based on the stored information that makes the display result of the variable display the specific display result. It is characterized by having.

According to such a game machine, the identification information is variablely displayed based on the determination result of the acquired information acquired by the entry of the game ball into the starting port, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Then, it becomes possible to execute a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player. Based on such a game, it is said that a special effect and a specific suggestion effect can be executed. The special effect is composed of a main effect and a preceding effect performed prior to the main effect, and can be executed based on the result of timekeeping by the timekeeping means. Further, the specific suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result. Then, when executing the special effect, the specific suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect (before the start of the main effect), and the specific suggestion effect in this case is a variable display. It is based on the fact that the acquired information whose display result is the specific display result is stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, when the specific suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect, the specific suggestion effect stores the acquired information that serves as a trigger for deriving the specific display result (execution trigger of the special game). It will function as a production that announces that it has been done. As a result, when the special effect is executed based on the result of timekeeping by the timekeeping means, the player is made to pay attention to whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed before the start of the main effect related to the special effect. It is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 described above.
A game state control means capable of controlling the game state after the special game is provided.
The gaming state includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
The specific display result includes a first specific display result in which the gaming state after the special game is the first gaming state, and a second specific display in which the gaming state after the special game is the second gaming state. There is a result,
The effect executing means is based on the fact that acquired information for converting the display result of the variable display into the two specific display results is stored at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect. It is characterized in that a specific suggestion effect may be executed.

According to such a game machine, when the display result of the variation display of the identification information becomes the first specific display result, the game state after the special game based on this becomes the first game state, and becomes the second specific display result. If this is the case, the gaming state after the special game based on this is the second gaming state, which is more advantageous than the first gaming state. Then, when executing the special effect, the specific suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect (before the start of the main effect), and the specific suggestion effect in this case is a variable display. It is based on the fact that the acquired information for which the display result is the second specific display result is stored in the acquired information storage means. Therefore, when the specific suggestion effect is executed at a predetermined time from the start of the special effect to the end of the preceding effect, the specific suggestion effect stores the acquired information that triggers the transition to the relatively advantageous second gaming state. It will be a notice that it has been done. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention regarding whether or not the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special effect is executed based on the result of timekeeping by the timekeeping means.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-1 or 5-2 described above.
The gist of the effect executing means is that the specific suggestion effect may be executed when the preceding effect is completed.

According to such a game machine, when the special effect is executed based on the result of timekeeping by the timekeeping means, the specific suggestion effect can be executed when the preceding effect related to the special effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize the end timing of the preceding effect as the execution timing of the specific suggestion effect. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest when the preceding production related to the special production is completed.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-4 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-3 described above.
The preceding effect is characterized in that it is a countdown effect that counts down until the main effect is started.

According to such a game machine, when a special effect is executed based on the result of timekeeping by the timekeeping means, a countdown effect that counts down until the main effect related to the special effect is started is executed as a preceding effect. Will be done. For this reason, the countdown effect (countdown display) executed prior to the main effect indicates the remaining period until the main effect starts (in other words, until the preceding effect ends), and is specified in that period. If the suggestion effect has not been executed yet, it indicates the remaining period until the period in which the specific suggestion effect can be executed ends. Further, when the specific suggestion effect is executed when the preceding effect ends, it indicates the remaining period until the specific suggestion effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest in the period from the start of the special production to the start of the main production.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 5-5 is the gaming machine of any one of Reference Inventions 5-1 to 5-4 described above.
Equipped with an input means for the player to input
The effect executing means is characterized in that the execution of the special effect can be stopped based on the input by the input means within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect.

According to such a game machine, it is possible to cancel the execution of the special effect based on the input by the input means within a predetermined time before the start of the special effect. Therefore, the player can arbitrarily stop the execution of the special effect by inputting using the input means, and when the execution of the special effect is stopped, the variable display is accompanied by this. The execution of the specific suggestion effect based on the storage of the acquired information with the display result of is also stopped. As a result, it is possible to set (select) the execution mode of the effect according to the player's preference.

According to the above-mentioned Reference Invention 5, it is possible to improve the gaming interest of a gaming machine having a function of executing a special effect at predetermined time intervals.

In addition, any two or more inventions of Reference Inventions 1 to 5 described above may be combined.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game area, 3A left game area (1st area), 3B right game area (2nd area), 7 image display device, 7a display screen, 8 production design, 20 1st start Mouth, 21 2nd start port, 26 3rd start port, 28 gate, 30 1st prize opening, 35 2nd prize opening, 41a 1st special symbol display (1st special symbol display), 41b 2nd Special symbol display (second special symbol display), 71 second image display device, 71a display screen, 72 third image display device, 72a display screen, 80 main control board (main control unit), 90 sub control board ( Sub-control unit), 92 RTC (timekeeping means), 100 image control board (image control unit).

Claims (1)

Identification information display means that can display identification information,
A special game execution means capable of executing a special game in which a predetermined game profit can be given to the player based on the display result of the variable display of the identification information becoming the specific display result.
A special effect period generating means capable of generating a special effect period in which a special effect image is displayed on a predetermined display unit at a predetermined cycle,
Equipped with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The effect executing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the advance notice effect regarding the variation display can be executed in different modes depending on whether the special effect period has occurred or the special effect period has occurred.

Images